Kanatara—The Story
—Path to Your Destiny
. . . an undiscovered island in the South Pacific
by Kanadave
Kanatara—The Story
Kanatara—The Story
. . . earth’s first web country
by Kanadave
First printing
July, 2016
Published by Aconcagua, LLC
Cook Islands, South Pacific
Kanatara—The Story
Copyright © 2016 by Aconcagua, LLC
All rights reserved.
No part of this book may be reproduced in any form or
by any means, except for the inclusion of brief quotations without changes, giving credit, whether in a review or otherwise, without permission in writing from
the publisher.
All characters in this book are fictitious. Any resemblance to actual persons, living, dead, or imagined, is
purely coincidental.
Published by arrangement with the author.
Avarua, Rarotonga, Cook Islands, July, 2016.
“Kanatara,” “Kanatara … earth’s first web country,”
“Kanaversity,” “PeopleCatalog,” and “PeoplePage” are
registered trademarks of Aconcagua, LLC.
First printing, July, 2016
Printed in the United States of America
ISBN 978-0-692-76151-9
[email protected] for typos, editorial comment,
permissions, publishers inquiries
Front cover photo by Rawpixel Ltd.
Back cover photo by Spanishalex
To the Great Spirit that guides the stars,
guided the ancient Chana people,
and will guide us as we come out of our chrysalis
and enter the coming age
Just when the caterpillar
thought the world was over,
it became a butterfly.
—proverb
CONTENTS
2000
1. Prologue—The Discovery
1
2. Sailing to the South Pacific
9
3. The Island Paradise
15
4. Return from the Island
27
5. Gathering Wind in the Sails
33
6. Going Back but Not Alone
41
2001
7. Hydrogen-e
55
8. Neutramica
63
2002
9. Mangoes, Macadamias, and Mahi Mahi
75
10. Ipanema’s Blimp
85
2003
11. Secrets of the Steletae
12. Worldview of the Chana People
91
105
Contents
13. Speak a Little Chana
117
14. Calendar and Numbers of the Ancient
Chana People
123
15. Andromeda Cruise Ship
129
2004
16. First Stroll on Kanatara
139
17. The Silent Bullet
149
18. First Marriage on the Island
155
2005
19. Maiden Run to Kanatara City
163
2006
20. 15° South/115° West
175
21. Building the Air Saucer
183
2007
22. Return from the Trek
187
23. Contact from Another Star System
193
x
Contents
24. Coyote to Butterfly
201
25. Tuning in to the Channel
207
26. Building the Galacta
213
2008
27. Superluminal Star Flight
221
28. Kanatara City—City of Awakening Dawn
229
2009
29. Return from Alpha Centauri
239
30. Going Global on the Internet
251
31. The Exploding Kanatara Culture
255
32. The PeopleCatalog
259
33. Luminous Wealth Development
263
34. Kanaversity
267
35. Solving the Planet Puzzles—The Conundra
271
36. DiggerLady Waves Her Arms Again
279
37. Grand Opening of the Grand Kahali Hotel
283
The Grand Adventure Toward your Destiny
291
xi
Contents
Appendix
297
English Glossary
299
Chana Glossary
309
Chana Calendar
319
Chana Numbers
321
pakaloh-a and kachapoh-a
323
Rules of the Universe
325
xii
2000
“Yes, I, too, feel that there is something very special
here,” David went on, “something I can’t put my finger
on. It’s like I can see myself. I can watch my thoughts
and watch my reaction to my thoughts. It’s like a mirror
where I can see myself. And everything seems very gentle. I feel like everything inside of me has come to a
quiet stop. It’s as if I am awakening . . . to something. I
don’t know how to say it. It’s like life . . . my life . . . has
a path . . . if I can recognize it . . . and walk on the path.
. . . Maybe there is a path for each of our lives.” His
eyes drifted up to the waning twilight in the sky.
1. PROLOGUE—THE DISCOVERY
The story begins a little after the turn of the millennium.
David S. and Douglas K. had met at Harvard
and become good friends during their academic days.
David had gone to the law school while Douglas was
across the Charles River at the business school.
Over the years, they had continued the friendship they had developed during their time in Cambridge. David had retired quite early from law, and
Douglas owned his own technology company. Both had
families now, were happily married, and had very stable
1
Kanatara—The Story
2000
financial statements. They were living not far from each
other in Southern California.
They and their wives got together from time to
time for dinner at each other’s homes. Last time, they
had gotten together at Doug’s house, down the coast
from Santa Barbara. This time, dinner would be at David’s, up the coast from Malibu.
Both families loved to sail, and often they
would sail together with each family on its own sailboat. They had sailed together down to Mexico, a couple of times to Costa Rica, and once all the way down
to Chile. On this particular evening, they planned to
discuss sailing and whether it might be time to take another sailing vacation.
David’s house overlooked the ocean, and after
dinner and wine, their wives, Julia and Marion, took a
barefoot walk along the beach. It was a beautiful warm
night. The moon reflected off the Pacific waves. They
decided to make their stroll a long one. They hadn’t
seen each other for a while and had lots to talk about.
They knew their husbands were about to get very engrossed. In fact, David and Doug had decided that surfing the Internet would be the central focus of their
evening’s discussion and dreaming. Maybe this time
they should sail further off the coast than they had before—going further out into the Pacific.
On the Internet, their focus was sails and wind,
compass points and currents, longitudes and latitudes.
Before long, they were out into the Pacific checking
waves and navigation. It got a little later, and their
wives still hadn’t returned when they found an island
that seemed to be the perfect destination. That was
2
Prologue—The Discovery
when they discovered Kanatara. Only it wasn’t called
Kanatara then—that would come later.
The island, some 2,000 miles (3219 km) west of
Chile, was at the top of a triangle with the bottom being
the Pitcairn Islands on the west and Easter Island (Rapa
Nui) on the east. It was roughly 15° south of the equator
and 115° west of Greenwich. They mused about tropical nights, white sand beaches, and blue, blue water.
Yes, maybe it was time to sail away again! They could
smell the salt spray and feel the hot sun.
Knowing the longitude and latitude of the island, they began to figure how long it would take to get
there. It was roughly 4,000 miles (6437 km) south of
San Diego. On a 50 foot (15 m) boat, it would take
them about six or seven weeks to reach the island.
Maybe they could even stop at Easter Island and see the
massive moai statues. The trip promised to be exciting.
They went to their nautical reference books and charts
to get a better look at the island. But the island didn’t
seem to appear where it was on the Internet. They
checked longitude and latitude again. No, strangely, the
island wasn’t there.
“Something has got to be wrong,” Doug said, as
he got up from the table where the books and charts
were spread out in front of them.
“Let’s check everything from the start,” David
suggested. “Somewhere we’ve made a mistake, obviously.” They went to the Internet again, noting longitude and latitude very, very carefully. This time there
would be no mistake.
“OK, definitely, we have it right this time,”
Doug asserted. They went back to their nautical atlases
and charts, but the island was not to be found. At this
3
Kanatara—The Story
2000
latitude and longitude on the maps, there was just ocean
blue. Nothing more. To make it even more puzzling, the
island appeared to be large. If it had been a small island, it might be hard to find, but a large island?
Though they knew their nautical charts were the
most accurate references, they checked geographic atlases and encyclopedias, too. Finally, they came to an
unreasonable certainty. They had found a large island
that did not exist on any maps. Before their wives came
back from the beach, they decided to charter a sailing
ship, one that would be large enough to take both families together. They would take a look at this “nonexistent” island. It would be a lot of fun with both families on the same ship.
Julia and Marion had just climbed the steps up
from the beach. They came into the study where their
husbands were lost in thoughtful anticipation. Marion
joked playfully, “Gosh, guys, it’s such a beautiful night
out, and you’re stuck in this study.”
“Uh,” David began, “I don’t know exactly how
to say this, but we have found a rather large island in
the South Pacific that doesn’t exist on any of our
maps.”
“So, you need new maps?” quipped Julia.
“I know it sounds kind of crazy,” David went
on, “but you know we have the best of maps and nautical charts. That can’t be the problem.”
Julia sat down close to David. “OK, honey,
what’s really going on here?”
Doug stood over the maps and charts laid out in
front of them. “We found this island on the Internet, but
it’s not in any of David’s nautical references or anything. We even checked encyclopedias.”
4
Prologue—The Discovery
“How many drinks have you all had since dinner?” Marion asked, putting her arms around Doug’s
neck. “As long as we’re throwing stories around, you
know, we saw a lot of polka-dot starfish flying around
the beach.”
“Look, you guys,” Doug smiled, “we haven’t
had anything to drink, and this island is about half the
size of Alaska.”
“OK, don’t take our word for it,” David
laughed. “You look on the Internet, and you look on the
maps!”
That sounded like a good idea, and for the next
hour, Marion and Julia went back and forth, noting very
carefully latitude and longitude on the Internet, and noting very carefully latitude and longitude in the nautical
reference books and on the charts.
“Well, guys,” Julia finally admitted, “I think
you found an island that doesn’t exist. That seems to be
the only reasonable conclusion we can come to.”
“Yes, and we think we should go take a look at
it,” Doug said, trying to hide his excitement.
“Well,” Marion, responded, “we all haven’t taken a sailing trip for a while. The last trip down to Chile
was a blast! The children still talk about it.” David and
Julia had three children, Torr, 9, Chetley, 14, and Yenia, 17. Doug and Marion’s children were Glynna, 11,
and Karina, 14.
Julia added, “The children will be excited about
taking another sailing voyage. It certainly appeals to
me! I need a new swimsuit anyway.”
David added, “And since it’s the tropics, we can
swim off the boat.”
5
Kanatara—The Story
2000
“Anyway,” Doug mused, “we always said salt
spray is contagious.”
David went on, “And of course, there will be
lots of tropical fruit. And fish . . . we’ll have lots of
fresh fish. Just like always, we can fry them on deck.”
By 4 a.m. they had done all the research they
needed. They would sail out to this island and see for
themselves.
In the coming days, they chartered a strong 52
foot (15.8 m) ketch out of San Diego. It was a white
ship with blue trim, and it’s name was Moirae, and it
had all new rigging. They bought and installed the most
advanced navigational equipment available. Within
three weeks, the ship was prepared and provisioned to
go. The two families drove down to San Diego for their
departure.
They all got together with a few friends for a
farewell dinner. Knowing they would soon be in the
South Pacific, they chose the Kona Kai on Shelter Island. Their ship was waiting for them nearby, and they
would sail off after dinner.
Looking forward to a tropical clime, they ordered the macadamia nut encrusted mahi mahi finished
in a pineapple triple-sec sauce, mashed potatoes and
seasonal vegetables. Then they had the Opera dessert—
“layers of coffee butter cream with chocolate ganache
and almond jocande cake”—and fresh brewed Royal
Kona Superior coffee.
After more coffee and more conversation, they
all walked over to the Moirae. Their friends knew they
wouldn’t be seeing them for a while. After farewell
hugs and kisses, they departed Shelter Island, waving
6
Prologue—The Discovery
good-bye as they went, and passed Point Loma on their
right.
With a sense of adventure, and maybe a sense
of destiny, they sailed out of San Diego Bay, heading
almost due south, into the South Pacific.
And that is how the story began.
7
Kanatara—The Story
8
2000
2. SAILING TO THE SOUTH PACIFIC
Sailing south from the California coast, the adventurers were in great spirits. They were enthralled by
the prospect of going to an undiscovered island. They
joked about being Robinson Crusoe and Captain Cook
all wrapped into one. They knew that some of their
friends thought they’d find a lot of blue ocean where
the island was supposed to be. But they also knew how
carefully they had logged what they had found on the
Internet.
Averaging about 200 nautical miles (370 km)
per day would put them on the island in three to four
weeks. As they sailed further and further south, the
weather became increasingly warmer, and the more
they got into a tropical mood. They passed the time
reading and playing chess. The four parents played
mahjong together, and so did the four older children.
They took turns on watch, steering, and manning the
sails. From time to time, they fished.
When they neared the equator, they took a
washbasin with a stopper in the bottom, just like they
had done on their way to Chile. They filled the basin
and watched the water go counterclockwise around the
basin as it went out through the opening in the bottom.
Closer to the equator, they entered the Doldrums, and for several days, their ship barely moved
forward. With no breeze for the sails, they could easily
9
Kanatara—The Story
2000
swim off the side of the ship. Finally, a little wind
pushed them on their way.
Then as they slowly reached the other side of
the equator, they filled the washbasin again and
watched the water go clockwise, round and round, until
the water all ran out. David’s youngest child, Torr, remembered his science lesson. “Hey, Daddy, this is just
like when we went to Chile!”
The sky was blue, days were hot, nights were
warm, and the water was calm. They were anticipating
landfall on their island in less than a week. But then,
clouds began to form on the horizon in front of them.
As they headed toward the clouds, the sea began to
roughen. They could see lightning up ahead. As they
got closer, they heard claps of thunder. They were
headed into a storm.
They were experienced sailors and had been
through many storms so they had no worry. As the vessel headed deeper into the storm, however, the waves
began to get quite high and the wind increased.
As lightning flashed through the clouds above,
David shouted, “This may be our last chance to eat for a
while.” Thunder ripped through the heavens. Doug
yelled, “Everybody ought to grab something to eat
now!”
“Looks like it’s going to be a good storm,” David shouted above the roar and emitted a loud laugh.
“That’s good luck for our trip!” Everyone went to their
stations to reduce the sails.
As night came on, the winds increased to a fury.
These sailors had experienced very strong winds over
their years of sailing, but nothing quite like this. Their
anemometer was registering an average wind speed of
10
Sailing to the South Pacific
90 knots (166 km) with gusts to 110 (204 km), and it
appeared the storm was getting stronger. The rigging
was holding, but they had narrowed it down to the minimum necessary to stay on course.
During the night, the wind speed increased to
140 knots (259 km). Some of the children began to cry.
The parents began to be fearful of being capsized. They
felt they were completely lost in the ocean even though
the navigational equipment was keeping them on
course. They had never been in a storm like this.
By the next morning, they were all tired from a
sleepless night, but the storm did not let up. They tried
to hold off their fears, but they were genuinely frightened. Nobody tried to deny it. “We were genuinely
scared to death,” they would say later. The sky was
black the whole day. The lightning made shadows all
around them. The roaring waves were now steep and
high. Cracks of thunder were almost constant. When the
ship was on the crest of the waves, they looked down
into deep canyons below. When the ship was in the
trough of the waves, mountains of water surrounded
them. The blue Pacific had turned grey and black. At
times they were surrounded by a deep, dense fog.
The anemometer reached 162 knots (300 km), a
category 5 hurricane, but the reduced rigging was still
holding, and they were staying on course. “It can’t keep
up like this too much longer!” Doug shouted to David.
“The storm can’t keep up this intensity—it has to run
out of steam!”
As the storm reached into the afternoon, David
agreed. “Yes, this thing’s got to blow over.”
As the second evening approached, the children
were reacting to the fear in their parents’ faces. They
11
Kanatara—The Story
2000
cried, saying they were afraid of the storm. “We just
want to rest from this thing,” sobbed Yenia, David’s
daughter. “We just want it to stop, stop, stop!”
“Help,” cried Torr, David’s nine-year old, hanging onto a stair rail. “We’re all going to die. I know we
are. I don’t want to die!”
Even with their superb navigational equipment,
they felt certain they would be lost in the storm. In spite
of their fears however, they were able to stay on course,
even during the night.
As the third evening and then the fourth evening
approached, both families looked at each other with
growing despair. If they could just see some hope . . .
but there wasn’t any. They were staying on course, but
the storm wasn’t letting up. The anemometer was hanging around 160 knots (296 km). The lightning and
thunder were unceasing. The days came and went. The
nights came and went. There was no change in the
storm. They were exhausted, hungry, weak, and almost
sick. There was nothing they could do but just hang on.
They would later say it was like they were staring right into the jaws of death itself. They could see
their doom, knowing they were as good as dead. They
could not survive. At the same time, they felt some
guiding force keeping them on course and protecting
them from a certain, watery death.
It wasn’t until the seventh morning that the
winds finally began to die down. Light began to come
through the heavens, and the mountainous seas began to
subside. Everyone was too worn out to respond to this
change. Their ashen faces were sallow, sunken. They
had no expression. Somehow the storm was over. They
were relieved, but were too tired to express it. Were
12
Sailing to the South Pacific
they really alive? Yes, they were alive. They had survived! Somehow! By afternoon, the sea was calm, the
sun was bright, and they could relax for the first time in
well over a week.
They slept all day and through the night. The
next day, they had their first real meal. They caught
some ahi and fried them on deck, just like they always
did. Doug brought out some wine. They had a subdued
and very tired celebration.
“If we hadn’t had absolutely superb nav-equip,”
Doug said in a tired voice, “we never would have made
it, that’s for sure.”
David laughed with fatigue, “I always thought
Davey Jones’ Locker was a joke.”
Doug laughed back. “Now, we know it’s not!”
They were still on course, and they began to feel
much better. Surely the island could not be much further ahead. In a funny way, they felt like they were not
the same people that had left California. The storm had
done something to all of them. They had survived
somehow and were still alive. But they were different.
The storm had changed them. Somehow, they felt purified—purified by the fire of the storm.
Maybe they still had that sense of adventure
they had when they sailed out of San Diego Bay. But
something had changed. Now perhaps, their sense of
destiny was resting deeper within them.
13
Kanatara—The Story
14
2000
3. THE ISLAND PARADISE
“Dare to dream large dreams. Nothing is impossible if
it is in your destiny. Under the brilliant blue skies of
our days and the star-studded skies of our nights is
movement toward light and growth. Our dreams are
the first rays of a new dawn. We are mapping invisible
landscapes. We welcome you with all our hearts. Come
enjoy your new life on Kanatara!”
In another day, the island slowly rose in front of
them. They were jubilant. “Yes, definitely not a small
island,” Marion gleefully opined. “Look at those coconut palms.”
“Well,” Julia chuckled, “to come all this way
and through that terrible storm, I’m glad it’s not just a
little island.”
“Wow! Look! I see mountains!” Torr shouted.
“Wow, Daddy, do you think we can climb them?”
“Probably not this trip, Torr,” his father answered, “but let’s put it on our list of things to do.”
“Yes,” Torr answered, “I’ve got it on my list.”
They approached the shore—a white sand beach
that went on as far as the eye could see. “Well,” Doug
exclaimed, “there’s our white sand beach. And if my
eye doth not deceive me, I believe I see mango trees.
This really does look like it will be our island paradise.”
15
Kanatara—The Story
2000
They all went ashore in three dinghies and
picked mangoes, papayas, bananas, and pineapples to
take back to the ship. “What with our provision of dried
wheat to bake bread, and with this fruit, and with our
fish . . .” Julia’s voice trailed off.
Marion finished the sentence for her, “. . . we’ll
certainly be living in paradise.” They both laughed.
After a time, they all got back into the dinghies
and went back to the ship. David and Doug fished over
one side of the ship while the children swam on the
other. Julia and Marion baked up some bread after
grinding their dried wheat. They baked the mahi mahi
their husbands had caught and made a mango-papayapineapple salad. They were going to have a real celebration.
“We are celebrating our arrival and our safety!”
Julia exclaimed as she lifted a glass of white wine.
After dinner, they began planning just what they
would do with this island. “I think the first thing we
should do is sail around it and get an idea of what it is
like,” David began. “It’s about half the size of Alaska.
We know that, but what is on the island? What kind of
an island is it? What is it really like?”
“Yes,” agreed Doug, “we need to really know
what we have here.”
So they decided to take a couple of months and
sail clockwise around the island. They would take lots
of notes and lots of photos.
Their arrival on the island had been on the
northern coast. As they sailed east, the white sand
beaches continued on their right, day after day. In the
distance, there were foothills, and looming beyond
16
The Island Paradise
them were snow-capped mountains. “So close to the
equator, but with snow!” exclaimed Julia.
“Yes,” said Chetley, David’s 14-year old scientific-minded son, “the permanent snow line is at 15,200
feet (4633 m), so those mountains must be over 18,000
feet (5486 m) high.”
Heading southeast, the mountains were closer.
When they were well onto the eastern side, there were
rain forests and jungles that extended all the way down
to the shoreline. There were coconut palms all along the
shore. They could see cloud forests up above at higher
elevation. The humidity was high. Apparently, onshore
sea breezes blew rain onto the eastern side of the island.
“It looks like this side of the island gets lots of
rain,” David suggested.
Chetley, David’s fourteen-year old, explained to
everyone, “These wet easterly winds go up and over the
rain forests and cloud forests. They continue on up into
the mountains where they drop huge amounts of moisture in the form of snow. That explains all the snow in
the mountains.”
“Very good, Chetley,” Julia suggested.
Marion raised her voice and asked everyone,
“Now, what do you say we go ashore?”
“We’re all for that!” the children jubilated. They
dropped anchor.
Yenia and Karina asked excitedly, “Where are
the machetes?”
“Yes,” agreed Chetley, “we’re going to need
machetes.” They put six machetes into the dinghies and
paddled ashore.
They made their way inland through almost impenetrable jungle, swinging their machetes at the vines
17
Kanatara—The Story
2000
and bamboo that blocked their way. It was nearly dark
when they got back into their dinghies and paddled
back to the ship. “At least, there are no mosquitoes,”
Doug exclaimed. “But lots of mangoes, papayas, pineapples. And I don’t think I’ve ever seen so many coconut palms.”
David responded, “And butterflies—so many
butterflies. And when we were leaving, did you notice
the fireflies?”
“Yes,” Doug continued, “yes, they were just
starting to light up. Lots of them. I’ve never seen so
many butterflies, and so many birds. So many different
kinds of colorful birds!”
Torr said excitedly, “I liked all the birds . . . and
the monkeys! Boy, I really liked the monkeys. And
those birds that go chá-nah chá-nah!” Torr imitated the
sound of the birds. “Chá-nah, chá-nah!” His father
laughed.
In the days ahead they headed on around the
island, first south, then southwest, and finally west.
Along the southern coast, they anchored the ship and all
went inland again. They found easily accessible plains,
rising up slowly from the shore. Wild life was plentiful
and fruit trees were abundant.
“Here, we don’t have impenetrable jungle,”
Doug smiled at Marion. “It’s just really nice. You notice now it’s not so humid? That seems to be mostly on
the eastern coast.”
After walking for some time, Marion yelled out,
“Oh, what do we have here? Do I detect ruins of an ancient culture?” Extensive ruins appeared to be of a people that had lived there very long ago. Marion expressed her interest in archaeology. “There really needs
18
The Island Paradise
to be a dig here. Maybe there are other ruins on the island.”
It did not appear that the island was inhabited by
anyone now. There were no boats anywhere around the
island. “If there were people living on this island now,
we would see their boats.”
The mountains in the background weren’t so
close now. “How far do you think those mountains are
from us?” Yenia asked.
“Well, I’d guess several hundred miles (500 km)
or so,” David answered. “They aren’t close, but they are
certainly high. Probably great skiing up there.”
“I’m going to put that on my list!” Yenia exclaimed.
A bit further around the island, the children
started shouting. David didn’t know what the commotion was. “What’s going on, children?”
“The waves, Daddy, look at those waves! Can
we get our boards?” The children had grown up on the
beach in Southern California and knew good waves
when they saw them. Before long, the ship was anchored again, and the children swam out to the waves
and began surfing. It was many hours before the children were tired and returned to the ship.
Coming further around the island, their white
sails pushed them north. More white sand beaches met
their gaze. They found a wide bay about half way up
the western side of the island and sailed into it. Doug
called to David from the front of the deck, “This bay is
the best one we’ve seen on the whole island! Really
beautiful, isn’t it?”
They sailed around the bay to see where would
be best to drop anchor. “Well, we’ve had a look around
19
Kanatara—The Story
2000
the bay,” David exclaimed to Doug. “What do you
think? Shall we drop anchor here and just take it easy.”
Doug responded affirmatively, as he pulled a
sail around, “We still haven’t gone all the way around
the island, but this bay does look really good. When we
come back to this island, this might be the best place to
land.”
David answered, “Well, that makes two of us
who are thinking of coming back.”
Now that the ship was anchored, they could relax for a while. They had been so busy sailing around
the island, they hadn’t taken much time to just relax and
take it easy. The children jumped overboard for a good
swim. David and Doug threw in lines on the other side
of the ship to get some mahi mahi. The sun began to
lower in the sky. While the wives cooked up dinner,
David and Doug took a swim themselves.
After dinner, they watched the sun set into the
western sea. The trip had been a good one. They had
good reason to feel good. The four adults relaxed in
deck chairs while the children did some more swimming.
The talk turned from fishing and sailing to more
personal things. They mentioned the peace and gentleness they had been feeling ever since they had approached the island in the beginning. In fact, this peace
seemed to deepen each day. The children were never
very quarrelsome anyway, but there had not been a single disagreement since they arrived. There had not been
a spark of negativity by anyone during their time together on and around the island.
This peace seemed tangible. They couldn’t really explain it, but it was if you could move your hands
20
The Island Paradise
and arms through it. Not as dense as water, of course,
but dense nonetheless. It wasn’t just an inner peace. It
was like you could feel it physically. There was also an
inner clarity of mind and thought—something perhaps
beyond mind and thought.
David and Julia decided to broach a subject they
had been talking about together for a few days. “Look,”
David began, “we’ve been thinking, and I don’t know
how to say this, but we’ve been thinking of just coming
back here and living here for . . . uh . . . the rest of . . .
uh . . . our lives.”
“Really?” Doug answered, surprised, “Well, uh
. . . we’ve been thinking the same thing!”
“No, really?” asked Julia. “Gosh, wouldn’t it be
great?”
“I mean, I really love where we live and the life
we have,” David said with a smile. “But, really . . . it . . .
really doesn’t compare, does it?”
“We feel the same way,” Doug went on. “We
love our house. I love my business. I never thought I’d
trade those for anything. In a way, some would say we
have the perfect life.”
“But one thing I have noticed,” David continued, rising out of his deck chair. “As we have sailed
around this island and seen its staggering beauty and
immensity, I have noticed the dense and physical peace
that we have been feeling. This is something we could
never have back home.”
“And this is something that is important to us,”
Julia went on to say.
“That’s important to us, too,” responded Marion. “It’s like you see your life in front of you here.
Your life just sort of stops and you can look at it. You
21
Kanatara—The Story
2000
have perspective. You can see yourself, perhaps better
than you ever could before. It makes you kind of wonder what your purpose in life is, anyway.”
Julia went on, “I’m not a particularly introspective person. I’m just a happy person. But here I’ve been
kind of thinking the same thing. What are we here on
earth for? I mean, do we have a purpose here?
“Our lives, David and I . . . we have just about
as good a life as anyone could ever hope for, but . . .
maybe there’s something more to life. Maybe . . . each
one of us has a special purpose. Maybe we have a destiny. I don’t know.”
Doug continued, “My business is great. I love
the people I work with. Life for Marion and me could
hardly be better. But I, too, have been thinking over this
past month, sailing around this island of great beauty. I
think I’ve seen a new me, a different me. A me that
wonders who I am, really. Of course I know who I am,
and maybe I’m sounding crazy, but I, too, have been
thinking about life, and my part in it.
“When I look up at the stars at night, I see their
beauty, of course. But I have also been wondering if
there is more to the beauty of the night sky, more to all
of this beauty, than just the beauty itself. I mean something deeper. Maybe way, way deeper. Maybe I’m not
making sense, but is there something more—that we
normally just overlook? We can’t normally see it?
Maybe there is a destiny for each of us that we are
missing.”
“Yes, I, too, feel that there is something very
special here,” David went on, “something I can’t put
my finger on. It’s like I can see myself. I can watch my
thoughts and watch my reaction to my thoughts. It’s
22
The Island Paradise
like a mirror where I can see myself. And everything
seems very gentle. I feel like everything inside of me
has come to a quiet stop. It’s as if I am awakening . . .
to something. I don’t know how to say it. It’s like life . . .
my life . . . has a path . . . if I can recognize it . . . and
walk on the path. . . . Maybe there is a path for each of
our lives.” His eyes drifted up to the waning twilight in
the sky.
“But, I’m not Robinson Crusoe,” David continued, sitting back down in his deck chair. “I don’t want
to live my life alone. I’m a very social and sociable person. I want people. I would need to have some of my
friends here. Both Julia and I would like to spend the
rest of our lives here, but we have to make a real life
here, or we’ll just get bored after a while.”
“Yes,” Marion agreed. “This paradise would
only be paradise if there were people, maybe lots of
people, and friends here. Maybe we could convince our
friends to come and then eventually, maybe their
friends, and so on.”
Julia went on, “But that isn’t all. There would
have to be a greater purpose for our living here. A purpose beyond just enjoying paradise on the island. Otherwise, it would just be a great vacation.”
Marion continued, “Vacations are great, but
there would be something missing in a permanent vacation. A vacation for the rest of our lives wouldn’t really
work.”
David mused, “How many people would it take?
Three hundred? Could we get three hundred friends,
friends of friends, and maybe, acquaintances? Could we
get three hundred to come?”
23
Kanatara—The Story
2000
Doug got up from his chair and walked about
the deck. He spoke with a growing tinge of excitement
in his voice. “Obviously, if a lot of people came here,
we’d have to develop the island. It would take the talents of a lot of people to build it up and make it comfortable for everyone.”
David got up and moved about the deck. He was
getting excited. “This bay would be a good center of
operations. This is where we should head when we
come back with our friends. We need some of those
friends to be able to grow food. Other friends would
need to know how to build simple living structures.”
“Yes,” Doug continued, looking up at the stars.
“We’d have to start out simple—roughing it for a
while.”
“That’s the way I see it, too, Doug,” David responded with even more excitement. “Probably starting
out with tents and cook stoves, then moving into some
simple living structures. Then, slowly developing the
island so more people could come.”
The children were back from swimming. They
gathered around their parents, noting the excitement in
the air.
Marion said, “I think the key is to choose people
with the right talents to do whatever is needed so we
can be reasonably comfortable while we begin developing the island.”
“Yes,” Julia added, “In the beginning, not everybody can come who may want to come. Later, lots
more people can come. But in the beginning, we need
people with certain skills and expertise.”
“And,” Marion went on, “it can’t be just any
kind of development. Whatever we do here, we don’t
24
The Island Paradise
want to change the way it is. We must walk very softly.
We don’t want to lose the peace and gentleness and
clarity that we’re feeling here.”
Yenia wanted to know, “Mom and Dad, are we
going to come back here?”
The children were watching the expressions on
their parents’ faces.
Karina exclaimed, “Then, are we going to come
back here and live?”
Chetley jumped in, “Forever?”
David responded, “Well, not so fast, but . . . ”
Doug interrupted, “But yes, that’s what we’re
thinking of.”
“Whoopee! Whoopee!” the children shouted,
jumping up and down.
<><><><><><>
Every day they made an excursion to the shore
in the dinghies. They spent hours hiking inland away
from the bay. When they returned they talked about
tropical butterflies, birds, and a bird that changed its
colors like a chameleon. They discussed the peace and
gentleness that seemed deeper the more time they spent
on the island. They made an evening excursion and
found fireflies to be as numerous as the butterflies were.
The children put them into glass jars and carried the jars
around like bright lanterns.
After about a week in the bay, they sailed on
north. On the northwest coast, date palms extended majestically into the blue sky. It was dry here. They got
into their dinghies again and were soon walking bare-
25
Kanatara—The Story
2000
foot in the soft sand of a beautiful desert that extended
to the beach.
“Wow,” squealed Glynna, Doug’s 11-year old.
“This is a nice big sand pile. I don’t want to leave.”
“Yes,” cried Julia to Marion, squiggling her toes
in the warm sand. “What a great place to come back
to.”
“Yes,” Glynna squealed again, “I want to come
back!”
Then they turned east to finish their circular tour
of the island.
26
4. RETURN FROM THE ISLAND
They had sailed completely around the island
and were back where they first arrived. They had been
very tired when they arrived on the island almost ten
weeks ago. Since then, they had been busy sailing
around the island. Now, that was all behind them. Now,
they could put things together in their minds.
They knew they could easily spend another
month just enjoying this tropical paradise. But something was pushing them to return and start moving forward with their plans. They felt they needed to get back
and start pursuing whatever it was that destiny seemed
to be guiding them, or even drawing them, toward.
As they began sailing back to San Diego, they
had two primary thoughts on their minds. Whom could
they get to join them on the island? And what larger
purpose could there be in developing the island? Could
the purpose be to allow others to benefit from the peace
that seemed so tangible? And the clarity that enabled
them to look so clearly at their own lives? They were
even beginning to ask, Could this be a great endeavor?
Could there be a great purpose here?
While they were thinking deeply about some of
these questions, clouds began to form on the horizon.
As they got closer, lightning began to pierce the clouds.
Closer and closer they approached to what looked like a
very dense storm. They began to have a feeling of déjà
27
Kanatara—The Story
2000
vu. “Oh, no, not again!” It looked distressingly similar
to what they had gone through not so very long ago.
Only this time, they had an idea. They would go
around the storm. This time, staying on course was not
so important. Once around the storm, they just needed
to head north somewhere into the Pacific and then head
toward San Diego. They weren’t about to go into this
kind of storm again. They had learned their lesson well.
They took a tack to the left and headed west,
paralleling the storm and the northern coast for a couple
of days. Then the storm began turning toward them, so
they tacked again to stay parallel with the storm. Now
instead of heading west they were heading south! For
two or three days! Never mind. The point was to get to
the edge of the storm and go around it.
After a couple of days heading south, the storm
again began turning toward them. They tacked again to
their left heading east for two or three days, sailing
along the southern coast of the island. As the storm
turned toward them again, they tacked to their left
again, heading north for several days along the eastern
coast of the island. Then the storm veered toward them
once again, and they headed back west again. Having
encircled the island, they found themselves back where
they had begun! There was no way to get around the
storm! It completely surrounded the island. There was
no way to get to San Diego except by going through the
storm, the last thing they wanted to do!
Being a practical man, David suggested,
“There’s no point going around the island again. We’re
going to have to get through this storm. Man the hatches! Here we go again!”
28
Return from the Island
Doug called out, “Let’s hope that it’s not like
the last time.”
But it was.
They kept their bearings straight to the north
and plunged headlong into the storm that took so much
out of them on the way south. Again the wind worked
itself up to hurricane strength. The thunder, the lightning, the mountainous waves were back again. The
children cried during long nights. The same fears of
capsizing and being lost in the storm gnawed again at
their minds. They stared again into the jaws of death.
They looked again into their doom and knew they were
as good as dead. And again, it seemed as if some guiding force were keeping them on course and protecting
them from certain death.
Once they got through to calm weather and the
bright sun, they could fish again. They could eat again.
But their thoughts of returning to the island had lost
some of its appeal. They began to wonder what was really going on with this island and this merciless storm
that went all the way around it.
Standing around on the deck one evening, David
began the conversation. “It would appear the storms are
some kind of intentional barrier to getting to the island.
I say intentional because it just seems not to be a random situation.
“Remember, the island is not on any maps. It
appears to be like in another dimension or something.
And it appears that the Barrier Storms, if we could call
them that, are a conceived way of keeping anyone from
going there. Nobody would put up with more than a
week of storms and risk their lives to get to an island
that doesn’t even exist on any maps.”
29
Kanatara—The Story
2000
Doug sat down in a deck chair and stretched out
his legs in front of him on the deck. He mused, “Do you
think it is a part of the design, then? That we have a
beautiful, undiscovered island that would discourage
everybody from going there?”
David took a deck chair and pulled it up to
Doug. He sat down and continued, “I’m even beginning
to wonder if this whole thing is not random—our finding this island on the Internet. Maybe that was not a
random event either. Maybe something else is going on
here, but what?”
“Yes,” Doug continued musing, “was finding
the island coincidence? Was it design? Was it destiny?
What was it?”
Julia came up behind David and put her hands
on his shoulders. “It does seem strange. We have an
island that doesn’t exist on any maps. Trying to get
there, we nearly lose our lives and barely survive. Then
when we arrive there, this dense peace and gentleness
come over us. We begin to see life with a most unusual
clarity. Sometimes I wonder if this is just a dream.”
Marion replied, taking a deck chair herself.
“I’ve thought the same thing, but it’s obviously not a
dream. And although I’d like to think that the Barrier
Storms, as David called them, won’t be there when we
return, I have the feeling it’s just a part of the whole
design. I just think they’ll always be there. It will be a
great deterrent to everyone except those who really
want what the island has to offer—and I don’t mean
white sand beaches, beautiful mountains, coconuts and
mangoes. There is something else. We all felt it.”
“It’s an inscrutable thing,” said Doug, looking
off into the distance. “If it is another dimension, it cer-
30
Return from the Island
tainly is a peaceful one, and it seems not to be interested in having just anyone enter it. I hate the thought of
having to go through it again.” Then he added determinedly, “but we made it through twice, so I guess we
can do it again!”
“That’s my man!” Marion exclaimed as she
threw her arms around Doug’s neck and gave him a big
kiss.
“Hey, I’ll do it again, too,” David said with an
increasing eagerness. “I guess there isn’t any easier
way. Anyway, it is paradise. That should be worth
about anything.”
The rest of the trip back was uneventful. From
time to time, David and Doug radio-telephoned their
friends and told about their experiences on the island.
As the weeks passed, friends told friends, and interest
in the island increased. In the week just before they returned, their friends said this was turning into a cause
célèbre. David and Doug were very credible individuals. Quite a lot of people were eager to hear about their
experiences. They wanted to get together and hear all
about this island.
They sailed into San Diego Bay about sundown
and put in at their slip on Shelter Island. There was a
group of about 150 friends, friends of friends, and acquaintances, happily waiting for them. Among them
were those who had thought this sailing vessel and its
crew would find just a lot of blue ocean out there where
the island was supposed to be.
After some time, David and Doug suggested to
their close friends that they join them in a celebration
dinner at the Kona Kai. They passed by the tiki torches
as they entered the restaurant. This time they ordered
31
Kanatara—The Story
2000
the Hawaiian marinated salmon, steak basted with tamarin glaze on a bed of baby spinach, pears, strawberries,
red onions, and candied walnuts. They had a lot to reflect on, so for dessert, they ordered the Chocolate Reflection, “dark chocolate cake engagé in a delightful
dance with chocolate mousse filling.” They continued
celebrating with Bailey’s coffee and whipped cream.
“It looks like this may be the beginning of
something big,” David remarked as they walked back
toward the Moirae.
Doug added, “It looks like we won’t have much
trouble getting friends to join us in going back.”
At that point, little did they know that throngs of
people would want their chance at paradise and maybe
even a life of purpose and achieving one’s destiny.
32
5. GATHERING WIND IN THE SAILS
As Kanatara raises its sails,
it catches the wind
and is blown toward its destiny.
The first thing David did when he got back to
San Diego was to call Jeff P., one of his old friends
from MIT. David, Doug, and Jeff had become good
friends in Cambridge and had maintained their friendship over the years. Jeff had been a department head at
MIT before he took a sabbatical leave to continue his
studies in sub-atomic nuclear engineering. He was the
kind of person that knew everybody, especially in the
scientific world, and was as well-liked as anyone could
be.
David knew that Jeff would be an invaluable
asset in whatever plans they would make about this undiscovered island. He was always good at making plans
and executing them. An excellent sailor, Jeff was now
spending time on his boat down on Cape Cod when he
received David’s call.
“Jeff, I told you that you were going to miss out
if you didn’t come with us! The island didn’t disappoint
us! In fact, it was far more than we ever expected!”
“Well, are you going back? Is it too late to get
on board? I know you, David. You’ve always got something up your sleeve. What are your plans for your is-
33
Kanatara—The Story
2000
land paradise? I know you’re not just going to let it lie
there!”
“Well,” David continued, “I need your help.
We’ve got to get together. Look, I can fly back to the
Cape, and we can discuss everything. I can fly into
Provincetown and spend a few days with you and
Shelly.”
“That will work,” Jeff responded. “This is a
great time for me. I don’t have any projects going right
now. I’ve been wondering what I should dig into next.”
They both hung up. David and Doug sent their
families on home up the coast. They had some work to
do in San Diego returning the ship to the charter company. Some of the rigging was in tatters, and they
would have to pay for that. Once that was finished, they
would be free to head back up the coast themselves.
Then, David could fly back East.
When David arrived in Provincetown, Jeff and
Shelly picked him up. By the end of a few days, they
had a rough draft of a plan. David stayed in close communication with Doug over the phone.
“First,” Jeff said, “you need a lot more scientists, engineers, and technology people involved. I will
contact those friends of mine I think would be of value
to the effort. They will contact their friends as well.”
“Why don’t we set up a small conference in
Cambridge?” David suggested. Jeff agreed. Doug continued to field calls on the West Coast. They set a time
for the conference.
Doug flew back for the conference and shared
the podium with David and Jeff. David and Doug
shared all they knew about the island, and Jeff spoke of
the opportunities for future development. The photos
34
Gathering Wind in the Sails
and notes taken at the island were shared all around.
These tended to heighten the interest that was already
growing. In fact, interest and energy were expanding
exponentially.
Those in the East were then invited to a conference in the West. Everyone wanted to sail to the island,
but a lot of groundwork needed to be done first. The
plan was coming together, but it was far from settled.
Doug explained to the conference in the West,
“A lot of people want to go to the island. Good. But the
island isn’t ready for them yet.”
One attendee raised his hand, “What is the problem with lots of people going to the island now?”
Doug answered, “As a practical matter, having
large numbers of people eating off cook stoves and living in tents will result in disorder. Plus, it will take time
to grow our food. We can’t just eat mangoes and coconuts all the time.”
Another attendee asked, “How do you foresee
the development of the island?”
Doug adjusted his microphone. “We will have
to do this in a number of stages. The first group to go
will include food production and home construction
people so we can eat and live in some reasonable comfort. The next group will include more food production
and home construction people so larger groups can then
go and live comfortably. The first group will include
scientists and engineers, and their numbers will increase
as food and residences are available for them.”
At the end of the conference, Jeff and a small
group drafted a position paper incorporating several
conclusions:
35
Kanatara—The Story
A.
B.
2000
The high caliber of molecular and subatomic nuclear engineers and scientists
interested in the project make possible
the research and development of:
(1) a new, clean energy source for the
island, and
(2) a new building material for all the
construction which will take place
on the island.
By taking all necessary scientific equipment to the island, the research and development can be done on site; the new
energy and building material can then be
utilized throughout the island.
There were other physicists interested in researching and developing anti-gravity vehicles as a way
of moving about the island. But it was felt this was not
important for getting started. They could work on that
project, but it would not be given priority. The position
paper added this subject as an addendum.
The conference on the West Coast took place at
David’s house overlooking the ocean. Organic food
people came down from Berkeley and talked about how
they could provide food on the island for those who
would go immediately. Next, they explained how they
could expand food production as the island population
grew.
Dome construction people from the Southwest
also came to the conference. They showed slides and
talked about how they could construct simple dome
structures out of earth. These would provide a place for
people to live and for the scientists and engineers to do
36
Gathering Wind in the Sails
their research. These domes could be expanded as necessary until the new building material was ready.
David and Doug were both excited by the quality of the people getting involved. Jeff had made sure
that some of the best scientists in the world were going
to play a part. Before three weeks were out, a plan was
finalized, and the list of initial participants was determined.
Over 400 people had expressed interest in sailing to the island, but to keep everything orderly, the list
was limited. About 90 people total were selected to go,
in addition to David, Doug, Jeff, their wives, and the
children. They would go on three 70 foot (21.3 m)
schooners and would leave in about three weeks. Only
the strongest ships would be chartered and all new rigging would be installed. The most advanced navigational equipment would be installed on each of the three
ships. These ships would go faster than the Moirae had
gone, so the trip to the island would be shorter.
Quite a few of the new participants didn’t believe the Barrier Storms would still be there. One fellow
from Cambridge was adamant. “David,” he urged,
“you’re going to a lot of trouble and expense. You
don’t really think that same storm is going to be there,
do you? Storms come and go. They don’t hang around
indefinitely.”
David responded, “Well, I think the Barrier
Storms will still be there. At any rate, we’re not going
to be unprepared and lose our lives just because some
of you think it won’t happen.”
“I just hope the island is still there by the time
we get there,” another voyager proposed.
David responded simply, “It’ll be there.”
37
Kanatara—The Story
2000
“By the way, Doug,” one of the scientists inquired, “can I go on the Internet now and see the island?”
Doug answered, “Well, David and I looked for
it when we got back, and we couldn’t find it. We had
bookmarked the pages, but apparently they had been
moved. I’m sure they’re still there somewhere.”
“Well, in the worst case,” another suggested, “it
will be a nice trip out in the Pacific, and we can always
visit Easter Island and the moai.”
David and Doug were getting used to this sort of
dubiousness and it didn’t bother them. “If some of these
people end up not going,” David said, “they will be the
losers. And if I’m correct, they will end up wanting to
go on a later trip.”
In packing up all the research equipment, it was
difficult for the scientists to know what equipment they
would need. They weren’t exactly sure what they would
be designing. Yes, a new form of energy and a new
form of building material. But until they got deeply into
the research itself, it would be difficult to predict what
equipment they would need. At any rate, additional
equipment could come on the next voyage to the island
with the next group of people.
Archaeologists were included in the first group
because of the ruins that Marion had discovered. It
would be important to learn as much as possible about
the people who lived on the island many centuries ago.
One of the goals of the archaeologists would be to determine the name of the island and the name of the people. They would also be seeking to learn what the ancient people called their mountains, rivers, bays, lakes,
and other geography of the island. If the ruins turned up
38
Gathering Wind in the Sails
writings that could be deciphered, Marion said she
wanted to learn to speak the language of those people.
Physicians were included on each ship in case of
disease or injury. But there was another reason. Once
they reached the island, the tropical rain forests promised to have plants and medicines that could be developed for the benefit of all mankind.
Among the ninety voyagers, about a third were
organic food production people. They were taking
along an abundant variety of seeds to grow fruits, vegetables, grains, nuts and legumes. They would also pick
mangoes, papayas, bananas, pineapples, and coconuts,
as well as exotic fruit not found in the cooler climes
where most of the voyagers were from. There would be
many man-hours of work to till the soil, plant, and then
harvest food for everyone. Fish would be readily available from the ocean.
About twenty construction people who would
go on the first voyage would build dome structures for
the island’s new residents. Working out of tents would
be all right for a while, but everyone should move into
sturdier structures as soon as practicable.
In addition to Internet satellite dishes for each of
the ships, they also took satellite receivers to be transferred ashore. These would allow the scientists, food
production people, and construction people to be in
contact with their counterparts all over the world. Solar
panels would provide the necessary electricity for computers and satellite dishes. Everything was coordinated
in advance so that work could begin immediately as
soon as they reached the island.
By the time the three chartered sailing ships left
San Diego Bay, there were 700 people on the waiting
39
Kanatara—The Story
2000
list for future trips. “Doug,” David asked, “is this thing
going viral?”
40
6. GOING BACK BUT NOT ALONE
“Kanatara is a geography where the impossible becomes possible. Here you have a launching pad for
merging your radiant mind and the light of your genius
with the brilliance of others. Give your imagination free
rein. Kanatara is a fresh breeze blowing across the
planet.”
The voyagers on the small flotilla of three sailing ships were divided into three groups depending on
the work they would do on the island. The scientists
with David and his family went on the first ship; the
construction people with Doug and his family went on
the second; Jeff and Shelly with the food production
people went on the third. In this way during the trip
south, each group would be together, talk, plan, and
compare notes. They could also communicate by satellite Internet with those who would come on later trips.
They sailed out of San Diego Bay, celebrating
as they went. Their spirits were high as they envisioned
the tropical paradise that lay ahead of them. They enjoyed warmer days as they headed south. They brought
out champagne as they crossed the equator. They fished
and watched Pacific sunrises and sunsets. They spent a
lot of time going over the details of what they would do
when they reached the island. Passing through the Doldrums at the equator, when there was no wind and the
water was especially calm, they stopped several times
41
Kanatara—The Story
2000
for a swim. There was good camaraderie and good
communication between the three ships by walkietalkie, radio, and Internet VoIP.
“I can’t wait until we get to the island,” one
shipmate exclaimed.
“Yes,” laughed another voyager, “I feel like
Gauguin, looking forward to my Polynesian paradise.
Good-bye civilization!”
For several weeks, all was perfect. Then clouds
began to form ahead of them. They saw lightning in the
clouds. These were the Barrier Storms.
Ninety people were about to have the death-like
experience that David, Doug, and their families knew
all too well. Before the water began to roughen, the
three sailing ships came along side each other.
Julia and her youngest two children, Chetley
and Torr, went over to the ship with Jeff, Shelly, and
the food production people. Marion and her younger
child, Glynna, did the same. This left David and his
daughter, Yenia, on one ship and Doug and his older
daughter Karina on another. In this way, those who had
earlier gone through the Barrier Storms were divided
between the ships so they could attempt to calm the
other voyagers as they went through the storms.
A day into the storm, the hurricane winds began.
Then came dark days of pounding mountains of grey
and black waves and the terrifying nights filled with
lightning and crashing thunder. Foggy storms coming
one on top of another exhausted every one. All the new
voyagers wished they hadn’t come. No one could escape the fear of approaching death. Grown men and
women stared into the jaws of death and looked into the
face of certain doom. David and Doug, their wives and
42
Going Back But Not Alone
their children counseled the voyagers that they would
survive, but no one believed them.
Eventually they did survive a week of horrific
storms. But not before everyone had been changed by
their death-like experience, something they would never, ever forget. They had been purified by fire, and they
had been changed. They would never be the same
again. It was like childbirth. A girl becomes a woman
when she gives birth. She can never go back and be a
girl again. What she has seen, she can never forget.
These men and women became new men and women
because of the Barrier Storms. They could never go
back and be what they were before.
Ninety very serious people, with shell-shocked
faces, even David, Doug, and their families, didn’t have
much to say for a couple of days. They just recovered
from their fears and the horrendous experience they had
passed through.
Then as the island came into view, a different
mood began to overtake the voyagers. “Land ahoy!”
someone shouted. They slowly recovered themselves,
started chatting, and before long were looking forward
rather than back. The three ships sailed into the wide
bay David and Doug had chosen on the first trip. The
ships dropped anchor. The food people were the first in
the dinghies to go ashore, with provisions and cooking
equipment. On the trip down, each ship had its own
provisions. Everyone on each ship shared in the cooking. But now the food people took charge.
Everyone was still tired as they got into the dinghies and went ashore. The food people had gone ahead
and picked a large quantity of fruit and had fish and
bread baking by the time everyone arrived. They had
43
Kanatara—The Story
2000
prepared a sumptuous, tropical meal. The food people
were not only food production people, but chefs as
well.
After dinner with glasses of champagne to celebrate their arrival, they headed back to the ships to
begin ferrying tents and provisions ashore. Until the
tents were well set up by the construction people, most
of the adventurers would stay aboard ship. As night began to fall, the voyagers began to settle down for the
night.
The island
*
“One thing, for sure,” Jeff said to David and a
small group around him, “I’m never going back. If I
have to go through those storms to go back to San Diego, I’m just not ever going back.”
*
This image was originally from Google Earth, but we altered it so it
doesn’t look like that anymore.
44
Going Back But Not Alone
“Don’t worry, Jeff,” David assured him, “you
won’t ever want to go back.”
“And finally,” Jeff continued, “if there is any
thought of throngs of people coming, you’ve got to
come up with a better way of getting people through the
Barrier Storms than small sailing vessels.” The others
agreed.
After dark, David took Julia in his arms and
confided to her, “I had forgotten what this deep peace
feels like. I remembered it dimly while we were away,
but it has really come over me now that we’re back. I
feel like once again, I am awakening. Something remains hidden. It’s like a destiny pushing all of us in a
direction without making itself known to us.”
“What an incredible thing it is,” Julia agreed.
“And I too had forgotten what it feels like. I, too, feel
once again that I am awakening . . . to something. I’m
more awake to life.
“Maybe we can’t remember this thing we call
‘feeling.’ We can only remember our reaction to the
feeling. That’s the way it is with childbirth. You can’t
remember the pain itself, just your reaction to the pain.
I had forgotten what this island feels like.”
Chá-nah, Chá-nah! Chá-nah, Chá-nah! They
heard the call of the birds. “Listen, honey,” Julia whispered to David. “Those are the birds that Torr likes.
Remember him imitating the sound of those birds?”
“Yes, sweetheart,” he smiled. “I think those are
‘chanabirds.’” She laughed.
“You know, Julia,” David went on, “there is a
certain honesty here. When I look into your eyes, I feel
I want to be completely honest in every small detail of
45
Kanatara—The Story
2000
my life. There is an innocence here, something very
pure and virtuous. I can’t explain it.”
“Yes, David,” Julia responded, “I know what
you mean, and I feel the same way. Even in the dark,
there seems to be a kind of light here.”
Doug and Marion came over, “The dense peace,
the clarity, whatever it is, it’s back isn’t it?”
“Yes,” Julia said, “we had forgotten what it
feels like.”
“We had, too,” Marion agreed. “I think most of
our fellow voyagers haven’t really picked up on it yet.
It’s quite subtle isn’t it? Give them some time, though,
and they’ll be swimming in it.” They all laughed.
David stroked Julia’s hair. “I remember our discussions when we were here before—about purpose in
life and destiny. I had forgotten most all of that in our
busy preparations for this return trip.”
“Yes,” Doug agreed, “it’s all come back now.
Just as clear as can be. What is our purpose here on
earth? Do we have a destiny? Here we are developing
the island, and I had almost forgotten why we’re doing
it.” He laughed.
Julia took David’s hand. “You know, I think our
purpose here will come to us without our having to
think about it very much.”
“Yes,” Marion added, “I think it’s here all
around us. Maybe we just don’t know how to put it into
words. Our purpose, our destiny, if we can call it that,
will unfold before us just as clear as those bright stars
above us.”
<><><><><><>
46
Going Back But Not Alone
The first week was a busy one—getting everything from the ships onto land. They set up tents and
cots to sleep on and a large cooking area.
Dome construction was a high priority. The
domes were to be made of native earth. The scientists
couldn’t begin their research until they had strong dome
structures to put their equipment in. They helped with
the manual labor constructing their domes. After their
domes were finished, they offloaded their equipment
into dinghies, sometimes several dinghies lashed together. Then they began their scientific research in earnest.
Next, the construction people started building
the simple homes for the people to live in. One by one,
the tents were replaced, and life got more comfortable.
The people ate together in a commons. The food
people prepared tropical gourmet meals that received
enthusiastic commendation. Although they had started
out with cook-stoves, it wasn’t long before the dome
construction people had made ovens for them as well.
Everyone shared in setting tables and doing dishes.
Even the children helped in the food preparation and
serving.
Everyone had a job to do and was hard at work.
When they had free time, they went swimming in the
bay.
Organic food production was a priority—
everybody would have to eat. The food people borrowed some of the scientists and construction people
for about a month of orchard planting. Fruit and nut
trees would take 4-5 years before harvesting could
begin. The orchards were planted near the bay since
there was no convenient way of traveling further inland.
47
Kanatara—The Story
2000
Likewise, the planting of crops was near the bay. Eventually other parts of the island would be opened up for
food production. In the tropics, one only needed to put
seeds in the ground, and they would grow.
One day, Jeff announced to David and a group
of fellow-workers that he was no longer “Jeff.” “I left
‘Jeff’ behind in the Barrier Storms,” he said. “He’s no
longer part of me. Just call me ‘Jepe’ [pronounced
Jépé].”
“Sounds good to me, Jepe,” said one of the molecular engineers. “I feel the same way. Arthur died in
the Barrier Storms. Just call me Atom Man.”
One by one, the other scientists began to take on
new personas—new names. The head of the group
working on the new energy source now wanted to be
called FireWater. “The old me died out there somewhere in those grey and black waves.”
“The same with me,” said a physicist whose
specialty was quantum mechanics. “My other self got
lost in the fog of the Barrier Storms, never to return.
Just call me Atom Digger.”
A theoretical physicist made it clear he was a
new person, too. “Just call me Zoom,” he said as he
looked up at the blue tropical sky.
The head of the scientists working on the new
building material wanted to be known as Claymaker.
He looked out into the blue Pacific. “The old me went
down to a watery grave somewhere out there in the Barrier Storms.” And so it was around the group until all
had new personas. They felt “new” and wanted new
personas to express that. This idea was soon taken up
by the food people and the construction people.
48
Going Back But Not Alone
One day, Jepe pulled David aside and said,
“You know, David, I find I can really think here. Something all around us makes everything very clear. We’re
all feeling this. We don’t know what it is, but it’s very
tangible.
“It’s like we can see deeper into everything. I
think we’ll be able to discover things here we could
never discover back in Cambridge.”
David understood. “Everything is amazingly
clear here, isn’t it?”
“Yes,” Jepe continued. “Let me give you an example. We want a clean energy source that is almost
unlimited, right? We want it to provide all the energy
needs of the island, right?”
David agreed, “Yes, we’re going to need a lot of
energy. To really develop this island like we plan to,
we’ll need a tremendous amount of energy.”
“Water is made from hydrogen and oxygen.”
Jepe continued. Hydrogen is an excellent energy
source. It burns quite easily and leaves only water as a
residue. It is colorless, odorless, tasteless, and is a highly flammable diatomic gas. Liquid hydrogen is used as
a concentrated form for storage.”
“That sounds good to me, Jepe,” David continued to agree. “I don’t know much about hydrogen, but I
do know it’s quite flammable.”
Jepe went on, “It can be burned for light, burned
in a piston engine or burned in a turbine. Or burned to
boil water for steam power. The modes of using this
energy are almost endless.”
“And now, you’re going to tell me there is water
all around us?” David kidded him.
49
Kanatara—The Story
2000
“Listen, David,” Jepe laughed and went on. “All
we have to do is separate the hydrogen out of the water,
and zippo, we can light up the whole island. Now, with
the clarity of thought we have here on the island, and
with some of the best scientific minds on the planet
right here with us . . . ,” he paused in thought, “. . . and
by Internet all around the world, I’m sure we’ll be able
to find a new technology to pull hydrogen out of this
beautiful blue water all around us.”
David could hardly hide his excitement. “That is
awesome! How long will it take?”
“Give us six months,” Jepe went on. “The clarity here, this incredible peace . . . maybe sooner!”
At the same time, the sub-atomic physicists
working on a universal building material were having
similar thoughts. As Atom Man expressed it, “I don’t
know if this is just a dream, or not. I feel like my mind
is in a kind of dream state. I’m having ideas I would
never have at home. We’ve all been noticing the same
thing. I mean, maybe this is another dimension.”
After dinner one evening, while David was still
at the dinner table, Claymaker came over and sat down
next to him. “What if we could invent any building material we want? What would be the characteristics of
that material if we had no constraints?”
David interjected with a laugh, “Claymaker, I
think there is something bubbling up inside of you.”
With a twinkle in his eye, Claymaker smiled
and continued, “We’re starting to feel that there may be
no constraints here except those of our own minds.
With this peace and clarity that everybody is feeling
and talking about, we could probably design any material we want.”
50
Going Back But Not Alone
His fellow physicist, Atom Digger, came over
and joined in, taking a handful of macadamia nuts from
the dinner table. “One thing we’ve been thinking about
is that the material should be made from the earth itself.
That way there would be no limit to the quantity that
could be produced.”
Claymaker continued, “Here’s a list of characteristics we allowed our minds to dream about.” He
pulled a paper napkin from his pocket and handed it to
David. “Here’s the list.” David read from the list.
1.
Made from the earth itself
2.
Malleable so we can form it into any
shape
3.
Variable so that we can adjust its characteristics:
a. Variable hardness (very hard like a
diamond, or soft, when we want it to
be soft)
b. Variable adhesion (slick or not slick
depending on the desired application)
c. Variable transparency or opaqueness
d. Variable color, even glow in the dark
e. Variable texture
f. Variable weight (lighter than aluminum or heavy as iron)
g. Variable heat co-efficient (feels
warm or cold to the touch as desired)
h. The resonance and warmth of adobe,
if desired.
i. To carry an electrical current or not,
as desired.
51
Kanatara—The Story
2000
“All of these thoughts,” Claymaker went on,
“that we normally would never think of, have given us
an idea of what material we want. Now, we just take
our sub-atomic equipment, do the research, and come
up with how to actually make it. I know this could never happen back home. In fact, I still find it difficult to
believe.”
A fellow molecular physicist, with his new persona of Moleculo [pronounced Moléculo], came alongside them and sat down. “Normally, it would be crazy
to think one substance could ever have all these characteristics. This would be considered quite impossible.”
Claymaker jumped back in, “But there’s something about this island—a luminescent clarity of
thought—something even beyond thought—that makes
all of us think that we could design a material with all
these characteristics and . . . ”
Moleculo interrupted, “Maybe we are in another
dimension, or we’re in contact with another dimension.
I don’t know. But the whole group of us believes that
such a substance is possible.”
At the same time that the physicists were buzzing—about their new impossible possibilities—the archaeologists were planning a sailing trip down to the
southern coast of the island. This was where Marion
had discovered the ruins on the first trip. They would
drop anchor there, hike inland, and take some time to
do some digging. The archaeological group had sailing
expertise. They could take one of the ships and sail
down there on their own. With the solar panels aboard
ship, they could run their computers and have satellite
Internet connection with the main group at the bay.
52
Going Back But Not Alone
They would take some food people along to
provide food for them. The food people had done lots
of research on how to live off the land—and sea. A few
dome construction people would also go along to set up
temporary quarters on land. Maybe it would be only
tents, maybe it would be domes. It wouldn’t matter. The
construction people would know.
And so the archaeologists sailed out of the bay.
Julia and Marion took their children with them. The
children were interested in archaeology, especially the
older ones, but the greatest attraction was surfing on the
southern side of the island. They well remembered that
from their first trip. After a few weeks on the southern
coast, they all returned.
<><><><><><>
And then suddenly, it was the solstice, December 21. Everyone had a lot to celebrate. They had all
made it through the Barrier Storms! And, they all found
themselves in a paradise of dense peace and inner clarity—a new life on a wondrously beautiful South Pacific
island.
They celebrated all night long on the shortest
night of the year. Then, they spent the longest day of
the year at the beach—swimming, snorkeling, and
sleeping in the shade of swaying coconut palms. This
was midsummer on the island, since it was below the
equator.
Great progress was being made on the island. It
was decided that the three sailing ships should bring
two more groups of ninety to the island in the coming
year—one in March and one in September.
53
Kanatara—The Story
2000
Then, the first year of the millennium—the year
2000—came to an end. What a year it had been! Almost a year ago, David and Doug had thoughts of taking another sailing vacation. Now, at the end of the year
2000, they were wondering if maybe they had somehow
sailed into another dimension. Where was destiny taking them?
54
2001
7. HYDROGEN-E
It was not easy to find volunteers for the trip
back to San Diego Bay and then back through the Barrier Storms to the island again. It would take at least
four men to crew each ship. David and Doug would
each be in charge of a ship. In spite of what Jepe had
said earlier about never going back, he agreed to man a
ship. Three additional volunteers with adequate sailing
experience were needed for each ship. In spite of the
terrors of the Barrier Storms, volunteers very dedicated
to the vision of the island and its future were found.
The three sailing ships sailed back to San Diego
Bay. All new sailing rigging was installed and another
ninety people had a death experience as they came
through the Barrier Storms in March. The ships brought
back more equipment and supplies that were needed by
the scientists and those in food production and construction.
The scientists had needed more equipment to do
the deep sub-atomic research required for their energy
and building material projects. Digging deeper down
into the atom and researching the electrons, the neutrons, protons, and quarks required some of the most
sophisticated equipment available. More top scientists
in physics and chemistry were in the group that came in
March.
55
Kanatara—The Story
2001
By now Jepe had two groups—one based in
Cambridge and one based at Caltech—who coordinated
things back in the U.S. Using VoIP, these groups were
in constant communication with the island and could
help in making all technical decisions.
Other scientists were needed on the island as
well—more archaeologists, but also biologists, botanists, entomologists, geologists, and zoologists—the
island flora and fauna needed to be catalogued.
The list of other needed people was also getting
longer. Food production especially needed more manual workers for clearing the land and planting the food
for the larger numbers of people expected to come to
the island. The three ships returned to San Diego again,
and in September ninety more people came through the
Barrier Storms. More people “dying” and “coming back
to life.” David and Doug began to laugh about it, but it
was never funny at the time. Again, the ships brought
more provisions.
David and Doug looked into the future and saw
throngs of people—millions perhaps—attracted to the
island. The dream of developing the island was growing
daily. But Jepe had been right. Although the early voyagers were truly adventuresome, there had to be a better
way of getting through the Barrier Storms. If people
heard about the terrors of the trip, they would be discouraged and the larger numbers of people would not
want to come.
“What are needed are large cruise ships with
gigantic ballasts and huge stabilizers to keep the ships
from being thrown about in the storms. Then the trip
could be exciting rather than terrifying.”
56
Hydrogen-e
Doug took up the conversation. “Large cruise
ships would also enable larger numbers of people to
come, rather than the relatively small numbers that can
come on sailing vessels.”
Then Jepe added, “Cruise ships are known for
their comfort and good food. The food could all be
grown on the island, and using the energy source the
scientists are hoping to develop, there would be little or
no cost to get people to the island.” All three agreed
that research on the new building material promised to
make possible the building of such ships.
<><><><><><>
During the June solstice celebration, 180 people
came together under a mango grove in front of the wide
bay. They called it “Butterfly Grove” because there
were so many butterflies. David and Doug officially
welcomed the ninety newcomers. Jepe went to the front
of the group and said he had an exciting and important
announcement.
“You all know now that this island has an incredible peace and clarity. Even though we’re living in
it every day, we don’t understand it.” The audience
murmured in agreement. “But, whatever it is, it has allowed us to make an astonishing discovery.
“You know about our need for energy and for a
building material. You also know how hard our scientists have been working in these areas. Well, I would
like to announce that our energy group has completed
its research. They have succeeded beyond our wildest
expectations!” All the people rose in cheering applause.
57
Kanatara—The Story
2001
FireWater came to the front of the audience and
found it difficult to hold back a big smile. Jepe gave
him a big embrace and introduced him. “I would like to
introduce FireWater, who will tell you about hydrogene.” The people rose again to applaud, and then quieted
down so he could speak.
“First,” FireWater began, “you all know how
the dream of this island is developing.” The audience
applauded again. “You know how we are dreaming of
great numbers of people coming to the island.” The audience rose again to cheer and applaud. “Well, I’m as
excited about that as you are. But the reality is that it
can’t happen without a lot of energy. A lot of energy.
“We’ve been dreaming not just about the great
numbers of people that can come, but also about how
we can have enough energy for all these people. For
example, food has to be brought from the fields to
where the people are living. Are we going to walk miles
and miles each day to orchards and farms and walk
back with our food?” The people laughed and clapped
their hands.
“What we need are tractors pulling large carts of
food for us. What will these tractors burn for fuel? We
decided quite a while ago that we want a clean fuel—
one that burns very, very cleanly—for our pristine island.” The audience clapped in agreement.
“Next, people need to be able to move all
around this stunningly beautiful South Pacific island.
There are plans on the drawing boards for monorails to
be built all over the island so people can move about
quickly and safely.” The audience oohed and ahhed at
this possibility and applauded again. “What clean fuel
58
Hydrogen-e
will be used to power the monorails? This is what we
have been dreaming about.”
“Yes,” the people nodded in agreement and
clapped again.
“Next,” FireWater went on, “consider lighting
up homes and offices and running factories. Also, we
have the beautiful blue Pacific all around us full of ahi
and mahi mahi and other delicious fish. What clean energy will power the boats to go out and bring those fish
back for us?”
“Whoooooh,” the people murmured in agreement. They listened with anticipation.
“Then, there is talk about cruise ships with huge
ballasts and stabilizers to bring people comfortably to
the island through the Barrier Storms. What clean energy will power those huge ships?”
The audience applauded again.
“Okay, we have lots of energy needs for the
dreams we have for this island. We have been dreaming
about this energy that we need. Dreaming, thinking,
dreaming, wondering, dreaming, conjecturing. . . .”
Just then a small boy ran to the front with a
large yellow balloon and gave it to FireWater. The
crowd cheered as Firewater picked up the little boy and
gave him a hug. “Isn’t this a great place?” Then he put
the boy down.
Firewater continued, “Where was I? Oh, yes.
Well, it helps to have some of the best scientists from
all over the world. But there’s something about this island that lets us think thoughts and dream dreams that
we could never think and dream back home. I can’t explain it, and neither can you. But we all know it is a daily fact.”
59
Kanatara—The Story
2001
Everyone stood up and applauded. They were
applauding the island as well as what the scientists had
done. They all knew by now how special this island
was—its clarity, its peace, its honesty, its gentleness. It
was easy to feel a personal attachment to it and whatever made it so unique.
“And it just began dawning on us—all of us scientists working on this energy project. . . .” He raised
his voice so everyone could hear clearly. “We have a
lot of water all around us!” Everyone laughed. “Water
is made of hydrogen and oxygen.” Everyone laughed
again. They knew where he was going. Word had gotten around as to what the scientists had discovered.
“Hydrogen is a great fuel.
“Well,” FireWater went on, “I don’t know if
we’re in another dimension or what, but we all began to
have ideas about a pretty simple concept—getting hydrogen from water. But something better than hydrogen. Hydrogen, yes. But something better. We don’t
really know how the ideas came to us, but we began to
see a way to do it. Maybe this island allows us to stick
our heads into some other dimension. . . .” The audience was on its feet, dancing and shouting.
FireWater was enjoying entertaining the audience and began dancing around the podium. “All we
had to do was take our heads . . .” He took his head in
his hands. “. . . and stick them into that other dimension
. . .” More laughter rippled through the audience. “. . .
and out came hydrogen-e.” The audience went wild
with shouts and applause.
When the noise died down and the people sat
down again, FireWater continued. “I’m not going to
bore you with a lot of fancy scientific equations on a
60
Hydrogen-e
blackboard. And anyway, much of it was done by computer simulation. But to keep it simple, we ‘messed
around’ with the atoms in the water molecule. . . .”
Laughter rippled through the audience.
“Yes, we ‘messed around’ specifically with the
electrons in the hydrogen atom, and using some antigravity technology, we have been able to separate out
the hydrogen. Not exactly hydrogen. We call it hydrogen-e. Hydrogen-e burns as a fuel very similar to hydrogen but with some other peculiar qualities. It is more
dense than hydrogen and is much safer and controllable—a fabulous and clean energy source.”
The audience was on its feet again, shouting,
clapping and dancing. Some of them went to the front
and started dancing around Firewater. With a big laugh,
he started dancing with them, round and round.
After they had settled down again, Firewater
continued. “Basically, what this means is that all our
energy needs can be met—whether it is power for tractors or power for monorails. Power to light up cities and
towns or power to run cruise ships. We’ll never run out
of water.” Laughter again rippled through the group.
“So we have all the energy we can ever need.”
David approached the podium and gave Firewater a big hug “Thank you, my friend. You have really
made our day! Then speaking to the crowd, he said, “I
also want to inform you that those scientists working on
the building material are getting close to a solution as
well.” The audience stood to applaud once again.
“Now, before we break up,” David continued, “I
want to give you a few facts. We now have 180 people
on the island.” The audience applauded.
61
Kanatara—The Story
2001
“Organic food production continues to expand,
both in quantity and in variety. Dome construction for
residences continues to expand for the expected new
arrivals. We expect another ninety new arrivals in September. More scientists, including archaeologists, will
be coming, and more food production workers.
“Before we are dismissed, let’s give one final
round of applause for the island and for hydrogen-e, our
new energy source.” Everyone rose and applauded one
last time. Then, they went back to their white sand
beach to continue the solstice celebration—snorkeling,
swimming, barbecuing, and enjoying the day.
62
8. NEUTRAMICA
By the solstice celebration in December, the 270
people on the island could look back on a most productive year. Food production had expanded. Domes for
living were keeping up with new arrivals. Hydrogen-e
was being produced in larger and larger quantities.
What a great year it had been!
People lit bonfires on the beach and kept them
burning all night. Kava had been discovered on the island, and everyone imbibed and stayed up until dawn.
The solstice celebration was larger than the year before
and was beginning to be a regular tradition, both in
June and in December. The next morning everyone met
together in Butterfly Grove, underneath the mango
trees, in front of the bay.
Jepe went to the podium in front of the audience. “I want to welcome our newcomers who braved
the Barrier Storms, who almost died, and came back to
life.” The audience stood and cheered the newcomers to
welcome them to the island. “These are our new brothers and sisters.” The audience cheered them again.
“I want to report that our organic food production is growing nicely. Our dome construction has expanded so that all our newcomers have domes to live
in.” The audience cheered again.
“With hydrogen-e now being produced, all our
homes can be lighted. Our cook stoves are being converted to use hydrogen-e. We know that living here is
63
Kanatara—The Story
2001
still a bit primitive compared to what we were used to
before we came here.”
An elderly woman stood up. “Don’t you worry
about that, Jepe. My persona is OldGrey, and my purpose in life for now is to work in administration with
the food people. I think all of us are willing to wait patiently until there is more advanced lighting, cooking,
and refrigeration.” The audience clapped in agreement.
Jepe continued, “Thank you, OldGrey. You
know that’s another wonderful thing about this island.
We are in such harmony and agreement on everything.
“Now, I have a very exciting announcement. I
want to talk about Neutramica.” The audience sat up
attentively. “Unlike hydrogen-e, which you can’t easily
touch or even see, one day you will see Neutramica all
over the island, in machinery, in buildings like a large
hotel where newcomers will stay. You will see it in the
monorails for transportation all over the island.
“You will see it in cruise ships so newcomers
can come through the Barrier Storms much more comfortably than in small sailing vessels.” The audience
cheered at this prospect.
A distinguished gentleman came to the front.
Jepe shook his hand and embraced him. Jepe faced the
audience and smiled. “I want to introduce to you the
head of the Neutramica project.” The gentleman faced
the audience, which gave him a round of applause.
“This is Claymaker.
“Please tell us, Claymaker, about Neutramica,”
Jepe suggested, looking out at the waiting audience.
Claymaker began. “Neutramica is our word for
neutron-hardened ceramic. The program that I direct
has to do with the production of all the Neutramica that
64
Neutramica
will be produced on the island. You may wonder how
Neutramica happened to come about.”
“Yes,” the audience agreed. They wanted to
hear all the details. They had heard only sketchy accounts before.
“Well, the scientists wanted a new material for
all the building that we are going to be doing on the island. Something that would not have the current limitations. Something we could use to build roads and buildings. At the beginning, we didn’t think of monorails
and cruise ships, but soon we realized we wanted a material that could be used for these as well. And the question of course was, where were the scientists going to
find it—this material that we wanted?”
“Yes, where?” the audience chimed in.
“Well, frankly,” Claymaker went on, “we all
knew we couldn’t find it. We knew we’d have to invent
it. Nothing like it exists anywhere in the world. But
something in the peace and luminous clarity of this island made us think we could invent it.
“We were fortunate to have first class world scientists that had come to this island, and many other scientists who collaborated with us by Internet, e-mail,
instant messaging, and VoIP.
“The first thing we did was to figure out the
characteristics of what we wanted in the ideal material.
We like to say that we dreamed a lot.
“We dreamed about the material we wanted and
what it would be like. We made a list of desirable characteristics. We wanted something made from the earth
so that we could make limitless quantities. We wanted
it to be malleable so it could be formed into any shape.
Then we wanted to be able to adjust its variables so it
65
Kanatara—The Story
2001
could be hard or soft, opaque or transparent, heavy or
light, and any color or texture.
“Then, once we decided what we wanted, we
went to the molecular level, the atomic level and finally
the sub-atomic level. We worked on the level of neutrons and quarks. It took us quite a while to find what
we were looking for.
“We spent a lot of time dreaming about how we
could achieve what we wanted. We just allowed our
minds to be open—to be quiet in the peace of this island. We didn’t know where the answer would come
from. So we just dreamed and thought a lot and let our
minds wander. We know we’re in some sort of different
dimension or something here, and with the clarity that
we all feel, the answer came.
“After a lot of time just sticking our heads into
that other dimension . . .” The audience laughed, remembering FireWater’s earlier way of describing how
hydrogen-e was discovered. “. . . we were able to make
a material whose characteristics could be changed by
working on the neutrons. In other words, we make the
material, but then we can vary the material’s characteristics by varying the neutron/quark component on the
sub-atomic level.” Claymaker paused, looked out at the
audience and asked for comments or questions.
Someone in the audience stood up. “My persona
is Potato Woman, and I work in food production. I’d
like to ask a question. Are there any other characteristics you ended up with?”
Claymaker continued, “Yes, there are. First of
all, Neutramica is very strong. It is many times stronger
than steel. At the same time, it can be lighter than magnesium. It can be very, very hard, almost impossible to
66
Neutramica
show scratches. But by working on the neutrons, it can
be very soft.
“The scientists are fond of saying that Neutramica has the warmth and resonance of adobe, which
makes it very livable for building structures for people
to live and work in. If any of you have ever lived in an
adobe home, you know how soft and pleasant it is. This
truly was a great achievement because you will spend a
lot of time in your home or office. Since Neutramica
will feel like adobe, you’ll be very comfortable.”
Someone else stood up. “My persona is BigCarrot. I’m working in food production. I’d like to ask
what Neutramica is made of.” BigCarrot sat down.
Claymaker continued, shifting his stance. “It can
be made of anything because we are working on the
neutron level. Anything that has mass. Simple clay.
Earth. Anything. So it is very inexpensive once there is
the technology to make it. Virtually free.”
BigCarrot continued, “So by changing the neutrons, you can change the characteristics?”
Claymaker leaned forward on the podium. “Yes,
that’s about right. But instead of changing the neutrons,
I want to say, ‘working on’ the neutrons. Perhaps that’s
an academic difference, but I want to be accurate. By
‘working on’ the neutrons, we change Neutramica’s
characteristics. That’s the beauty of the technology. If
you want it to be transparent, you can see through it like
glass. Yet it can be opaque and virtually any color of
the rainbow, just by working on the neutrons. Another
characteristic the scientists designed into it was that it
can be almost frictionless, or have any degree of friction you want. Also, it can be virtually any texture you
want.”
67
Kanatara—The Story
2001
Another person in the audience arose. “My persona is HammerHead. I’m on the construction side of
things. Could you please tell us about the production
facility?”
Someone handed Claymaker a young coconut,
full of coconut water, and with a straw. “Oh, thank you.
I was getting a little thirsty up here.
“The production facility is about 30 miles (48
km) inland from a bay on the southwestern coast of the
island. There we have plenty of earth because we are at
the end of an alluvial plain. We are a small but growing
base of people and operations. The base is computerized and self-managed to a great extent, and can run 24
hours a day, digging out the earth and turning it into
Neutramica. The scientists and crew there make sure
everything runs right.”
Potato Woman stood up to ask another question.
How are you able to dig out the earth? Do you have
some machine for that?”
“Yes,” Claymaker responded, “we had one of
the returning sailing vessels bring us an earth-digging
machine which we were able to convert over to run on
hydrogen-e.”
Another person stood up. “My persona is CottonTail, and I’m also in construction. I’m wondering
what Neutramica looks like when it comes out.”
Claymaker answered. “It comes out in two
forms, liquid and solid. Liquid to pour into molds, and
solid in various preformed shapes and sizes as desired.
It comes out in an adobe color but it can be changed to
any color desired, even right at any construction site
where the Neutramica will be used. One development
68
Neutramica
to be used especially for the Monorail, just now on the
drawing board, are colors that glow for night travel.”
The audience oohed and ahhed approvingly.
“Hmmmm, a glow!” someone exclaimed.
Someone raised his voice and exclaimed, “Awesome! Truly awesome!”
“Of course,” Claymaker continued, “the Monorail is only on the drawing board now. But it will be a
very important part of the island development. People
have to get around, and a good transportation system is
essential.”
A tall lanky fellow with a cowboy hat raised his
hand. “My persona is Texan and I’m with food production. My purpose in life, at least for now, is to see that
all food coming from field and orchard is properly
washed. I’m sitting here trying to envision how the
Neutramica is used at a construction site?”
Claymaker continued, taking another drink from
his coconut. “Unlike conventional building materials
such as wood or stone, Neutramica can be molded to
any shape desired. Because of its strength and malleability, there is no reason for buildings to have rectangular shapes, or even straight lines.
“Once it is poured into a mold, then the neutronselector sets the Neutramica to retain its shape and to
give it the desired color and other qualities. Later, if
desired, the neutron-selector can bring the Neutramica
back to its liquid state or re-set the shape or the qualities.”
A dark-haired young woman way in the back of
the crowd raised her hand and spoke loudly. “My persona is BunnyBaby. I’m in construction, and I have a
69
Kanatara—The Story
2001
question. You mentioned it can also come in solid form.
Is that true?”
Claymaker answered, raising his voice so she
could clearly hear. “Yes, it can come in whatever preformed shapes are desired. For example, in constructing
the bicycle roads and paths that are planned, it will often be easier to lay Neutramica blocks than to pour the
Neutramica into long molds. Likewise, for the Monorail
rails, it will be easier to construct them using preformed
rail units, rather than pouring the Neutramica into very
long molds.”
HammerHead had another question. “What will
hold the blocks or units together?”
Claymaker continued, taking another drink from
his coconut. “That is also a very good question. The
neutron-selector works on them so that any two pieces
can stick together, something similar to a magnet but,
of course, much stronger.”
HammerHead continued, “The neutron-selector
does all this?”
“Yes, it is a type of machine that sets or regulates all the properties of the Neutramica—strength,
hardness, friction, color, transparency and other characteristics desired. Although it needs to be somewhat
close to the Neutramica, it doesn’t need to touch it. To
use an analogy, because this is all extremely high technology, it ‘talks to’ or ‘drives’ the neutrons to be in correct formation for the desired characteristics. When the
Monorail comes into a station, the neutron-selector can
even change its color before it leaves the station.”
A person who identified himself as BigDaddy
stood and asked, “So, really, what are all the things that
Neutramica will be used for?”
70
Neutramica
Claymaker came around to the front of the podium. “This is the best question of all. Here’s where we
all get really excited. Neutramica will be used for everything. A great hotel where newcomers will stay, all
the buildings in the villages, towns, and a large central
city, as well as the bicycle roads and paths and the
Monorail. Cruise ships for the newcomers to come in.
All will be made from Neutramica. Which, by the way,
means we need a tremendous amount of building material. That’s why our plant is going 24 hours a day, six
days a week. But the factory is still small. One of the
things we will be doing is expanding it—especially as
new workers come to the island.”
A young woman with pink ribbons streaming
from her hair stood up. “My persona is TractorGirl, and
I’m hoping to drive a tractor one day. I want to ask
what energy do you use to run your plant? Is it hydrogen-e?”
“Yes, it is,” Claymaker answered, “and by the
way, we will produce lots of tractors and tractor carts to
move the food from the fields and orchards to where the
people are living. We will also produce other agricultural machinery the food production people will need
for planting and harvesting.
“We will also produce large-wheeled all-terrain
vehicles so we can more easily reach parts of the island
that are currently inaccessible. Even when there are
Monorails with bicycle and hiking paths, there will still
be parts of the island we can only reach by all-terrain
vehicles. I might mention also—we will be producing
bicycles and pedicycles for transportation. But all of
this production will require skilled designers, machine
tool operators, and tool and die people that will be com-
71
Kanatara—The Story
2001
ing with the next group of newcomers in March. They
also will design generators as well as refrigerators and
stoves that will be powered by hydrogen-e.”
A young woman with an orchid behind her right
ear stood up and moved to the front of the audience.
“My persona is Kachina, and I’m with the construction
people. What’s all this about a great hotel? We’ve heard
about it, but not much in the way of details.”
David stood up and came to the podium to answer. “Much of this is just on the drawing boards as far
as the details go. But basically, the great hotel will be
where all new arrivals will stay. At some point, they
will decide to move into residences in other parts of the
island such as the central city for example. Wherever
the Monorail goes and the Mini-Monos, which are
smaller scale monorails, there will be adjacent bicycle
and hiking paths.”
A red-headed fellow with bib overalls stood up.
“My persona is LettuceHead with food production.
Will people be able to bring automobiles to the island?”
The audience tittered.
David remained standing and answered the
question. “No, there won’t be any autos on the island.
All transportation will be by Monorail, Mini-Mono and
bicycles. And pedicycles. Our planned large-wheeled
all-terrain vehicles are not considered a mode of general
transportation. They will be used for special tasks such
as archaeological expeditions and other special missions. There will probably be some other means of getting around, using advanced technologies. But no, it
was a calculated decision not to go the way of automobiles. Traffic jams and auto accidents just didn’t feel
right for the island.”
72
Neutramica
The audience laughed, and clapped in agreement, and yelled, “Yea!”
Doug stood up and went to the front. “Also, I
should mention that no fossil fuels of any type will be
used on the island.”
The audience clapped and yelled again, “Yea!”
A man with persona Galileo stood and spoke.
“We’ve heard about these cruise ships. What about the
production of the cruise ships?”
Claymaker moved behind the podium again.
“That is one of the most ambitious single projects we
have, although the Monorail and the central city are certainly very big. The cruise ships are mold-poured at an
inlet on a bay on the western coast of the island. It requires a great deal of Neutramica. The production of the
fleet will grow to accommodate great numbers of people that will be coming to the island from all over the
world. We plan to start with smaller cruise ships, and as
we gain experience, build larger and larger ones.”
David came forward to the podium. “Well, we
certainly have learned a lot today. All of this is very
exciting. Let’s give a round of applause to the island
and to all the Neutramica people!” He then dismissed
the crowd to their continuing solstice celebration.
73
Kanatara—The Story
74
2001
2002
9. MANGOES, MACADAMIAS, AND MAHI MAHI
At the June solstice, the people were ready for a
time of celebration. They had worked hard over the past
six months, and now was a time to relax. As usual, they
lit bonfires at the beach, drank kava, and stayed up all
night. The next morning, they all gathered near the bay
under the mango trees in Butterfly Grove. There was no
end to the variety and color of the butterflies. Some
were quite large with eight-inch wingspreads. The butterflies seemed to want to celebrate, too.
David went to the podium. “Welcome to all you
newcomers! You survived and got purified in the Barrier Storms!”
The audience cheered and clapped their hands.
“There are now 180 more of you who are our
new brothers and sisters!”
The audience cheered again.
“Ninety of you came in March and another 90
of you came just a couple of weeks ago, bringing our
island population to 450. More scientists have come,
more food and construction people, and now architects
and designers. Architects will begin designing the great
hotel, the central city, and residential developments
around the island. Monorail designers will design the
Monorail.
75
Kanatara—The Story
2002
“The largest contingent of people coming in
March and June are those who will design and make the
machine tools to construct the generators, tractors and
tractor carts, earth-movers, bicycles and the largewheeled all-terrain vehicles, called LaWhATs, and even
refrigerators and stoves. We want to welcome all of
you!”
The audience cheered and clapped their hands
again.
“You have been giving us lists of items you
would like the sailing vessels to bring back to you when
they return each time. We have been doing our best to
keep up with your needs and desires. Although our
dream is to be self-sufficient someday, we’re a long
way from there at this point. We cannot yet produce
any plumbing or electrical supplies, not to mention
computer and printer parts or paper. But I have heard
that some of you are working on producing paper.”
Doug came forward to the podium. “As you
know, in early 2002, as our small Neutramica factory
began operation, you decided not to use the Neutramica
to replace your dome structures with more permanent
Neutramica structures. You all felt that could wait.
More important was building machines out of the limited quantity of Neutramica being produced. So now,
machine parts are being milled to produce Neutramica
engine blocks, pistons, cylinders, and rings. These engines will burn hydrogen-e and produce electricity.
They will also drive tractors and other agricultural machinery, LaWhATs, and earth-movers.
“The tractors and agricultural machinery will
greatly facilitate the growing of crops and moving the
harvested food from the growing areas here to the bay
76
Mangoes, Macadamias, and Mahi Mahi
where we are all living. More food means more people
can come to the island.
“Large-wheeled all-terrain vehicles, the
LaWhATs, will allow us to explore more of our island.
They can go through and over almost any terrain. As
you know, at this point, all overland travel is by foot,
and because of the size of the island, this is a severe
limitation. The earth-moving equipment will be essential for building the Monorail and the central city. Bicycles will allow you greater freedom of movement.
“At last year’s solstice celebrations, the talk was
all about hydrogen-e and Neutramica. This year, the
topic for our June solstice is organic food production.
We want to report on the island’s food supply. Even
though tropical fruits grow everywhere, we have a
growing population and we need a better plan than just
picking fruit off the trees.” The audience laughed.
“I’m going to turn it over now to FoodHead to
tell you about the food side of things. All this delicious
food that you’ve been eating is due to FoodHead and
his food people. Let’s give him a round of applause.”
The crowd stood, applauded, and cheered.
FoodHead came forward, patted his stomach,
and began. “Food is pretty important.” Everybody
chuckled.
“Seriously, one of the first things we had to figure out was how to make it possible for scientists, technology people, construction people, archaeological
teams, and others to be here. All these people would
need to eat.
“So, that was David and Doug’s first priority.
They brought the food people in first. We made a lot of
plans before we arrived on the island back in 2000. Da-
77
Kanatara—The Story
2002
vid and Doug gave us as much information as they
could from their first trip around the island.”
Doug interjected, “We found the very best food
people we could find—some of our planet’s best organic people. You are benefiting from research done by
thousands of people all over the world about the best
way to approach food, for health as well for taste.”
FoodHead continued, “What kind of food? Almost everything will grow here. We live in a giant garden. Coconuts on the east coast. Date palms on the
west. All kinds of nut trees. All kinds of fruit trees. Lots
of mangoes, papayas, pineapples. Lots of exotic fruits
and vegetables you’ve never heard of. We’re just now
learning their names, like mape, nono, uru, manioc, and
the ufi yam. There is such a wide variety of climates
and elevations on the island, almost anything will grow
somewhere—if not in one part, then somewhere else.
Most crops, wheat, corn, beans, soybeans, all grains, all
vegetables grow very well. Grapes—we have some
very large vineyards now. We expect to make champagne and wine before too long.”
The crowd applauded.
“As transportation around the island improves,
we will be able to grow food in the higher elevations.
We will be growing a wide variety of herbs for teas and
for other purposes as well. We have factories on the
drawing board to make tofu, soymilk, almond milk as
well as coconut ice cream and other delights. I even
heard that someone is starting a small granola factory.
We will harvest maca, cacao, vanilla beans, as well as
sugar cane.”
FoodHead threw a couple of coconuts up in the
air. “You may have been wondering where we get all
78
Mangoes, Macadamias, and Mahi Mahi
the coconuts and dates you’ve been eating. Well, we
have sailed to the northwest coast for dates and to the
southeast coast for coconuts. Sure, you know there are
coconuts here at the bay, but not in the quantities you
want to consume. Some of you are eating three coconuts a day. You want young coconuts just for the water,
and we want to be able to provide that for you.”
Doug interjected again. “And who does all this
agricultural work? The food people. Many of the people
who are coming have said they want to be in food development and production. They will be planting huge
fruit orchards, thousands of acres of mangoes, oranges,
lemons, apples, pears, papaya, olives, figs, avocados,
and more thousands of acres of pecans, cashews, almonds, and macadamias in different parts of the island,
near the coasts.”
FoodHead continued, “All of this will be greatly
expanded when we have tractors that can go further into
the interior. Also when we have hydrogen-e boats, we
can bring food to you from distant parts of the island.
At this point, we can only use the sailing vessels.
“This is also true for fishing. The waters around
us are full of mahi mahi, ahi, monchong, opah, and other delectable ocean fish. Hydrogen-e boats will allow us
to greatly expand our fishing. They will even allow us
to go up the large river that comes down from the
mountains and enters the ocean on our southern coast.
Maybe we will find salmon there.
“We wanted to get the fruit and nut orchards
planted early because you can’t harvest some of these
for four to five years. For other crops, there are thousands of acres under cultivation for the huge numbers
of people we expect will be coming to the island. From
79
Kanatara—The Story
2002
everything we hear, this thing is catching on and growing very fast. We have to stay ahead of the wave so
newcomers can have all the delicacies we are becoming
used to.” Everybody nodded in agreement.
“We have almost 200 people working full-time
to serve you. These people are very dedicated—people
who work hard and work smart. No herbicides, no pesticides, no fungicides. We’re using the best-known
techniques from all over the world. By satellite Internet,
we are in touch with the best of organic knowledge
available. The tractors and other agricultural machinery
now becoming available are revolutionizing our food
production. It was pretty hard before. Now, it’s getting
a lot easier.”
David stepped behind the podium again and put
his arm around FoodHead’s shoulder. “FoodHead said
it right. It was pretty hard before. Now, with the growing quantity of Neutramica machines being built, much
less physical work has to be done by hand. We are inventing new ways to plant and harvest crops, even cotton. One day, we will be able to produce all our own
clothing here on the island. Basically, we have to be
ready for the growing numbers of people that will be
coming. Our waiting list is getting longer every day.”
The people gave a big round of applause.
FoodHead continued. “While you are all welcome to eat in the commons, more and more of you are
eating at home at least some of the time. So, come to
the commons when you want to. Eat at home when you
want to. When you want to cook and eat at home, our
market is open for you. You can choose the best of organic fruits and vegetables, nuts, grains and legumes.
Just come and take what you need. Our food production
80
Mangoes, Macadamias, and Mahi Mahi
people work hard to make our market the very best possible in both quality and variety. Our cooks go to this
same market to select the food they prepare for you
when you eat in the commons. And in the market, we
want to commend you for not taking more than you
need, being careful not to waste. You have been exemplary in this.
“A word about meat—we decided in the early
days of the island not to slaughter animals here. That
didn’t seem to fit with the light and peace on the island.
For inveterate meat eaters, we just ask for your understanding.”
David continued standing next to FoodHead.
“As you may know by now, final plans are being drawn
up for the first of what we’re calling Andromeda cruise
ships. Last September, we had quite a group of ship designers and shipbuilders join us here on the island. They
have been working very steadily. The first cruise ship
should be ready by the middle of next year and will be
tested for about six months. You will be happy to know
that they will be quite a bit larger than the sailing vessels. They will have oversized ballasts and stabilizers to
make going through the Barrier Storms thrilling rather
than terrifying.”
The people gave a big sigh of relief, then stood
and applauded.
One woman with tears in her eyes said, “My
persona is GrayHead, and I wanted my family to come
here to our beautiful island. But there is no way I could
suggest going through the Barrier Storms in those little
ships.” The people applauded once again.
81
Kanatara—The Story
2002
“It should be ready,” David continued, “to bring
the first group of passengers to the island by the end of
next year.”
A fellow in his twenties raised his hand. “My
persona is Wunnerful, and I don’t yet know what my
purpose in life is. But I’d like to ask how many passengers the Andromeda will carry.”
Doug answered the question. “The first one will
hold about 540 passengers. Later, we will build larger
ones that will hold 1,500 people. Finally, we will build
the largest ones, which will hold 3,000 people. Once the
island can absorb great numbers of people, we will
build a fleet of these. Like a lot of things in life, start
small, and then get bigger.
“You most likely know that construction has
also begun on the first Monorail, built of Neutramica,
and run by hydrogen-e. There are two parts to the building of the Monorail—the Monorail cars themselves, and
then the rails they ride on.”
Doug asked, “Are there any other questions?”
A gentleman midway back in the group stood
up. “My persona is Pauncho, and I work in food administration. Are there any plans for future gatherings to
have microphones and loudspeakers? It’s a little hard to
hear sometimes.”
“Yes,” David answered, “I forgot to mention
that. A number of you have talked to us about this idea.
By the December solstice, we should have a total sound
system for our gatherings. Our population is growing
and so our gatherings will be bigger and bigger. There
is also a growing number of excellent musicians among
us, and starting next solstice, we will have music.”
The audience clapped and responded, “Yea!”
82
Mangoes, Macadamias, and Mahi Mahi
A fellow in his teens stood up. “My persona is
Orchard Boy. You can probably guess I am one of the
food people. I’d like to let everyone know we have
picked a great quantity of macadamias, and I want to
suggest you try macadamia nut/pineapple salad.”
“Sounds delicious!” someone spoke up, and the
audience applauded.
A woman then stood up. “My persona is Rocket
Girl, and I’m with the Anti-Gravity Project. You don’t
hear much about us—we’re not considered as important
as some of the other projects. But I just want to say that
the project is going quite well, and we are definitely
making progress.” The audience applauded and one
person shouted, “Yes, bring it on!” Then there was
more applause.
“I have a food question,” said a fellow in his
thirties in a yellow T-shirt. “My persona is Machine
Man. I’m helping design and make the various engines
and machinery for the island. My questions is whether
there is any chance we’ll be getting kiwis? I love kiwis.”
“Yes,” FoodHead answered, “we have started
kiwi production, and you should be seeing them sometime next year.” The audience applauded.
“By the way,” FoodHead continued, “I almost
forgot to mention that our kava production has been
greatly expanded. I don’t think we’ll ever have a lack
now.”
David asked again, “Are there any more questions?
“If not, let’s give a round of applause for the
island and for all of you here.”
83
Kanatara—The Story
2002
The crowd stood and gave a rousing, shouting
ovation.
“You are dismissed.”
<><><><><><>
Sometime in the fall another ruins had been discovered by some inland hikers. Then, just before the
December solstice, a third ruins had been discovered by
still other hikers. Like the first ruins, they appeared to
be the remains of a very old culture. The archaeologists
on the island immediately hiked in to both locations and
began digging.
During 2002, the three ships had brought 270
new people to the island on three voyages for a total of
540 people by the December solstice celebration. Those
who were ferrying the ships back and forth through the
Barrier Storms each time were brave men and women.
They had a most unusual camaraderie and a special
place in the hearts of the people. They were known for
their calming reassurance to the fearful and frightened
new voyagers.
84
10. IPANEMA’S BLIMP
The December solstice celebration started in the
evening as usual. The new sound system was set up,
and speakers were placed around the crowd in such a
way that everyone was close to a speaker. Everyone
could hear well, yet none of the speakers was loud. A
variety of musical groups offered their music. People
danced. Bonfires were lit and kava was imbibed. The
fireflies lit up the night.
The next morning, there was a surprise. A few
people had gotten together in their spare time. They had
constructed a large blimp and had it filled with hydrogen-e (much less explosive than hydrogen). It had a
gondola underneath for the pilot and a few passengers
to ride in. It had a rudder and an engine that drove propellers so the blimp could freely maneuver about.
In the morning before sunrise, the orange and
yellow ship made its way toward Butterfly Grove. As
people made their way to the grove to continue the previous night’s celebration, they saw the ship above them.
There were shouts of glee as the word spread of the
floating craft above them.
During the morning, the blimp lowered itself
and landed near the grove at pre-arranged tie-downs.
The people gathered around to inspect the blimp.
As the crowd gathered together in the grove,
David took the microphone. “Good morning, brothers
and sisters!”
85
Kanatara—The Story
2002
The crowd boomed back, “Good morning!”
“We have some announcements, but first I want
to introduce to you the woman in charge of producing
this gorgeous blimp that has been entertaining us by its
presence. It was a secret project, so it is a surprise for
our solstice celebration. Please come forward. This is
persona Ipanema.”
The crowd cheered and welcomed her to the podium.
“Hi!”
The crowd called back, “Hi!”
“You are certainly a beautiful group of people
out there. Every one of you is special. And everyone of
you has a special purpose for being on our island.”
The crowd applauded.
“I’m not sure yet what my destiny is, and I don’t
think it’s building a blimp, but I do know that if I ever
find my destiny, it will be here on this island.”
The crowd cheered and clapped their hands.
“I first got the idea of a blimp when I heard the
term ‘hydrogen-e.’ A light bulb went off inside my
head, and in my mind I saw this big blimp flying over
the island. I didn’t think too much of it at the time, but
it kind of stuck in my head.
“It happened that I had a friend who was working with Neutramica. I began asking him a lot of questions like, ‘Can Neutramica be made thin but very
strong?’ He said, ‘Sure no problem.’ I asked about any
size limits for something built out of Neutramica. He
said, ‘No, we will build a huge hotel out of it. There are
virtually no size limitations.’ I kept asking him more
questions and eventually asked him if he’d be interested
in helping me build a blimp.
86
Ipanema’s Blimp
“I knew that he had some close friends in hydrogen-e development and production, so I figured getting hydrogen-e into the thing wouldn’t be a problem.
Once the blimp was made, that is. And of course, we
wanted to keep it all secret. I had to bring a couple of
machine people into our inner circle because we needed
an engine, rudder, and propellers, as well as a gondola.
I knew they could make those things.
“They made these various parts and were able to
sneak them out a piece at a time without being noticed.
Then we moved them a few miles into the interior in a
LaWhAT we were able to get. It was all very exciting.
The harder part was to make the big blimp and get it out
without being seen. My friend was able to make the
blimp on a weekend when no one else was around. On
that Sunday night, we were able to get our hands on another LaWhAT. We got the big blimp out without anyone noticing. We dragged it behind the LaWhAT those
several miles into the interior without being seen.
“Now, we had everything cached a few miles
away and could begin putting it all together in our spare
time—always late at night and on weekends, of course,
so we wouldn’t attract any attention. Finally, we had it
all assembled in a place where no one would ever see it.
Then on a weekend night, we commandeered a large
quantity of hydrogen-e and went out in another
LaWhAT and filled up the blimp. And, of course, it
went up, up, up. We were so taken with its rise that we
almost forgot to secure it down! Just in time, we secured it, or all of our hard work would have been lost. I
doubt we ever would have seen the blimp again!
“The blimp will carry four people and go about
15 miles (24.1 km) per hour. I don’t think it’s practical
87
Kanatara—The Story
2002
for transportation, but it’s great for sport and seeing the
island from high up.”
She jumped up and down and spun around.
“That’s about all I have to say.”
The crowd stood to cheer and applaud. They
clapped their hands and shouted, “Yea!”
David came back to the podium just as a barefoot young woman handed him a coconut with a straw.
“Thank you, my dear. Well, I guess our blimp just goes
to show what happens when we are free to think and
dream, when we work with others in a free environment. Let’s give Ipanema another round of applause.”
The crowd gladly accommodated.
“Now, Doug is going to come up here and say a
few words.”
Doug took the microphone, “Anything would be
anti-climactic after that!”
The crowd laughed.
“But,” he continued, “before we disband our
assembly, I would like to mention a few items. You
have all noticed the new sound system.”
“Yes, yes!” the crowd agreed.
“You probably know that hydrogen-e generators
are now plentiful so each of your homes can have all
the electricity you need. You no longer need solar panels to run your computers.”
“Yes, yes!” the crowd agreed again.
“Neutramica lamps are also plentiful. These will
give a nice soft glow or can be adjusted to be quite
bright. Of course, they burn hydrogen-e.
“Construction has now begun on the Andromeda cruise ship. With more people, the Neutramica production has greatly expanded. More people has also
88
Ipanema’s Blimp
meant more production of Neutramica hydrogen-e tractors and LaWhATs. Also bicycles and pedicycles are
now being produced for your use. To continue to grow,
more people will be needed in Neutramica production
as well as in the factories that produce all these things.
“I think that’s all I have.”
A small group surrounded Doug and began to
dance. Doug joined in and began dancing as someone
handed him a half coconut filled with kava and a straw.
“Happy solstice, Jepe!” Doug waved his arms at
Jepe who was at the back of the crowd.
“Happy solstice to all of you!” David shouted to
the crowd as he joined the dancing group. The crowd
began to disperse.
Ipanema’s blimp was loosed from its tie-downs
and slowly rose into the air. Ipanema waved to the departing crowd.
This had really been a good year. Lots of progress had been made.
89
Kanatara—The Story
90
2002
2003
11. SECRETS OF THE STELETAE
At the June solstice, the people stayed up all
night celebrating, dancing to music around bonfires,
imbibing kava, and watching the stars. Since there were
no mosquitoes on the island, everyone was comfortable.
Under a waning half moon that came up quite late,
some people swam in the bay.
The next day, all the people gathered at Butterfly Grove in front of the wide bay. After an hour and a
half of music from several groups, David came to the
front and looked out on nearly 700 people. He took a
microphone and began the program.
“Thank you, musicians. Thank you very much.
Wasn’t that music delightful? Well, we have lots more
in store for you today. First, I would like to announce
that the Andromeda cruise ship is almost complete and
will shortly begin its testing, going through the Barrier
Storms and out into the Pacific. There will be a launching ceremony for the ship at the upcoming equinox. If
you are interested in sailing down there for the event,
please let us know.”
The audience cheered.
“Next, Neutramica production has greatly expanded, and construction is now beginning on the
91
Kanatara—The Story
2003
Monorail as well as the port and pier where the Andromeda will dock.”
The audience cheered again.
“Finally, construction has also begun on the
great hotel where newcomers to the island will stay
starting early next year.”
The audience stood and clapped.
“Jepe, it’s yours, now.” David sat down.
Jepe came to the front to introduce the main
speaker of the day. “Before I introduce the person who
will lead our program, let me give you a little background.
“Three archaeological ruins discovered on the
island have now been excavated. In all three digs, a
great amount of material has been unearthed. The archaeologists have found large numbers of steletae,
hardened clay tablets with writing on them. These tablets are being deciphered using computer simulation. It
appears that these ruins are of an ancient people that
inhabited our island in the distant past.”
The audience clapped in delight, their energy
rising. “Bring it on!” one man shouted.
“The person who is now going to tell you about
these archaeological finds and the people of this culture
of long ago is my good friend, DiggerLady. She is the
administrator of our three archaeological teams. Please
give a nice welcome to DiggerLady!” The crowd
clapped and shouted.
“Hello, everybody!” DiggerLady smiled broadly
at the crowd. “Wow, it’s really great to be able to stand
before you and tell you of the exciting and very revealing archaeological discoveries our teams have made.
92
Secrets of the Steletae
“The first thing I want to tell you is that we now
know the ancient name of this island. A lot of you and a
lot of us have been wondering about this for a long
time, and now, we finally know.” The crowd began to
move about with anticipation.
“Are you ready for this?”
The crowd yelled back in unison, “Yes, we’re
ready! Tell us the name! Tell us the name!”
DiggerLady continued, “The name of this island
is . . . Are you sure you’re ready?”
The audience began standing up and dancing
around, shouting, “We’re ready, we’re ready. . . .” It
became a chant, and then a song. “We’re ready, we’re
ready. . . .”
After the crowd had settled down, DiggerLady,
filled with the energy of the crowd, shouted and waved
her arms up and down, “If you’re sure you’re ready, the
name of this island is . . .”
The crowd was on its feet, moving around and
dancing. The people were waving their arms up and
down.
DiggerLady shouted into her microphone,
“KAH-nah-TAH-rah! Ka-na-ta-ra! Kanatara!”
At this the audience swooned and fell into a
paroxysm of emotion. In their exhilaration, people
danced and rolled around on the grass. They shouted,
sang, beat drums, and blew horns. This was obviously a
monumental moment.
Ipanema’s blimp drew near overhead and threw
out basketfuls of hibiscus and orchid blossoms. The
crowd began a chant, “Kanatara . . . Kanatara . . . Kanatara!”
93
Kanatara—The Story
2003
After about twenty minutes, the crowd settled
down again, and DiggerLady could continue. She
waved her arms up and down again. “The people were
called the Chana people! CHAH-nah people, and they
were Kanatarans.”
Once again, the crowd went into an emotional
frenzy. Again, they began a chant. “We are Chana people, too! We are Chana people, too! We are Chana people, too!” Some people had tears running down their
faces. They were embracing and kissing each other.
One man with a huge yellow balloon on a long string
went racing around the circumference of the crowd.
After some time, the crowd settled down, and
DiggerLady could go on. “To the ancient Chana people,
the beautiful snowy mountains behind you were the
Tara Mountains. The highest peak was HaKatana. The
river running down from the mountains across the
plains and to the ocean was the Kanakuli River. The hot
springs up in the mountains were called Kamakala. The
lake in the lower mountains only recently discovered
was Ulumi Lake, and the desert was the Chana Desert.
Finally, the bay in front of you was called Kahali, and
the western coast was called the Kana Coast.
“The names the early people gave to the towns
or villages where we have our digs are as follows: the
name of the dig near the Neutramica base was Kanataka; the original ruins discovered by Marion on the
first trip near the southern coast was Kanahana; and the
most recent find on the southern edge of our large desert was Kanatana.”
The people stood again to applaud and shout.
The man running around with the yellow balloon ran to
the front, bowed to the crowd, and handed the balloon
94
Secrets of the Steletae
to DiggerLady. A woman with a red balloon, even larger than the yellow one, also ran forward, bowed to the
crowd, and gave her balloon to DiggerLady.
“Thank you so much! Two balloons!” she exclaimed.
She continued her discourse. “Now that we have
those large-wheeled all-terrain vehicles, the LaWhATs,
it really makes it easy to get in and get out of the digs.
Not that easy, mind you, but I mean easier!” The crowd
chuckled. They knew the difficulty of moving around
the island without roads.
“From the very beginning of the discovery of
this island back in 2000, when Marion discovered the
ruins now known as Kanahana, we’ve all been wondering who the people were that lived before us on this island. Who and when, we wanted to know, and were
they special because of the deep peace and clarity of the
island that we feel today? We all know this feeling of
something like destiny here, and a presence of something almost guiding us, like in another dimension. Did
those people experience this same thing as well?
“By the way, the construction and food people
were terrific from the beginning, making dome homes
for us, moving generators, building ovens—basically
making our lives livable while we were out in the wild
digging in the earth to uncover the secrets of the steletae. In a moment, I’ll tell you more about the steletae.
“First of all, we have here on the island some of
the top archaeologists in the world. They have been
drawn here by the idea that this island does not exist on
any maps and yet has clear evidence of a culture that
existed here long ago. With their help, we have been
95
Kanatara—The Story
2003
able to piece together a fairly clear picture of who the
people were and how they lived.
“Our initial findings indicate that the Chana
people may have lived here eight to twelve hundred
years ago. But this is just a guess. We have some outstanding scientists here on the island who are working
on carbon-e, a new and extremely accurate way to date
the age of materials in an excavation. Carbon-e will be
much more accurate than the carbon method scientists
have been using up to now. Our scientists are working
closely with the hydrogen-e people since in both cases,
it is the electron that is being manipulated. Hopefully,
by next year, we’ll know how far back in time the
Chana people lived.”
DiggerLady continued. “And now lets talk
about the secrets of the steletae. Steletae are small stelae, hardened clay tablets with writing on them. According to our teams, the Chana people used a type of
hard-fired ceramic for these steletae. Perhaps in a sense,
this was a distant forerunner of what one day would be
Neutramica, the neutron-hardened ceramic that will be
used to build Kanatara’s homes, streets, Monorail, and
cruise ships.
Because the ceramic is quite hard, the remains
of the Chana people’s writings, vaguely similar to cuneiform, have been preserved remarkably well. Almost
all steletae are intact, and to find one broken is unusual.
Most steletae are about 7 to 8 inches (19 cm) wide and
about 10 inches (25 cm) high and about half an inch
(1.3 cm) thick. The Kanataka team may begin to publish their findings next year, including translations of
the steletae. The other teams plan to publish their findings as well.”
96
Secrets of the Steletae
DiggerLady further explained, "In some places,
we are finding thousands of steletae piled together in
multiple stacks in various places. They seem to indicate
something akin to libraries or historical archives of
some sort. Were these stacks used in their everyday
lives, or were they piled up prior to their mysterious
departure, to leave some kind of record? NAH-chah
hun-chah-NAH.” The crowd laughed. “That means ‘We
don’t know’ in the Chana language. More about their
departure in just a minute.
“The archaeologists so far don’t know what the
stacks and piles of steletae mean. They just tell us that
in the field of archaeology, this is most unusual. These
stacks of steletae contain a tremendous amount of information. By entering the writings into computers and
running deciphering programs, we are able to get a
good idea about the Chana people and their culture.
“As I mentioned, some of the world’s leading
archaeologists are here on the island. They have spent
considerable time learning about this people of a past
age. One of the attractions of Kanatara is not only its
wealth of ruins, but also the fact that they are so remarkably well preserved. So far, however, no clues
have been unearthed as to why the Chana people one
day sailed away, every one of them, in great boats, and
were never heard of again. Why did they leave? Where
were they going? So far, only question marks. NAHchah Hun-chah-NAH. We don’t know.”
The crowd looked at each other and laughed.
“SpadeMan, would you come up here and say a
word or two? SpadeMan is a member of our team.”
“Well,” SpadeMan began, “the Chana people
were quite literate and had a well-developed ability to
97
Kanatara—The Story
2003
express themselves. The Chana people wrote things
down far more than people of other similar past cultures. This has allowed our archaeological experts—and
by the way, they are in contact with other top archaeologists all over the world—this has allowed them to determine a great deal about the Chana language and culture.”
“Thank you, SpadeMan, for those words.”
SpadeMan sat down.
Jepe came to the front and, pointing to SpadeMan, asked, “SpadeMan, my dear friend, how was it
that you came to this island?”
SpadeMan got back up and explained, "I was in
my doctoral program in archaeology and someone mentioned this new place that had been discovered. That
was back at the end of 2000. I thought, well, I can get
some experience for six months and come back. After I
came here, I never wanted to leave. There was something here—I felt something here that I could not explain—a kind of awakening. Of course, we all know
that now, but at the time, it was so very unusual. I knew
I couldn’t leave. Plus, I am learning more here than I
was in my doctoral program. Here, I rub elbows with
top archaeologists from all over the world.”
Jepe asked DareDigger, another team member,
to come to the front. She shared a similar story. “I was
in my doctoral program when somebody said there was
this island that had never been discovered before. I had
broken up with my boyfriend and just decided to take
on something new. Once I got here, I never wanted to
go back.
“Kanatara is an unbelievable place. The feeling,
the inner clarity, the feeling of coming awake . . . to
98
Secrets of the Steletae
yourself . . . to life, cannot be described. Of course,
there are the ruins, but also the climate is great, the indigenous tropical food is great, and the people who
have come here are great. On the weekends, we go exploring. Kanatara is awesome. It’s tara, beautiful. I
know I could never leave. It’s like falling in love. There
is something so deeply emotional about the feeling of
this place. I could never go back. NAH-Chah, No. Why
would I? Why would any of us?"
Jepe smiled at DiggerLady. “I have a few questions about things I think our crowd would like to hear
about.”
“Go ahead, my friend!” DiggerLady kicked at a
rock. “I’ll talk all day about our excavations if you
like.”
“What kind of people were the Chana people?”
“Well,” DiggerLady looked up at the clouds.
“We have excavated at three locations now. So far we
have never found a weapon of any kind, which is pretty
unusual in ancient cultures. Apparently, from what we
can understand, they developed the inner world to the
point that they could have peace in the outer world.”
SpadeMan, still standing near the front, asked to
speak again. “Yes, they were a peaceful people, with no
enemies. They governed themselves by consensus.
They had a council of elders, which they called the
‘wisdom circle.’
“I would also like to mention something else
that will interest you. They sent great boats all over the
world. They knew the world was round. They had a remarkably well-informed understanding of the larger
world in which they lived. When their great boats came
back from long sea voyages, there were tales of people
99
Kanatara—The Story
2003
who lived in ice houses, advanced civilizations of black
people, and people who lived in large pyramids.”
Jepe raised his eyebrows. “Lived in pyramids?”
SpadeMan continued, “Apparently, when they
saw pyramids in the Americas and in Egypt, they
thought people lived in them.” He stretched out his arm
and waved it. “And then one day, they all sailed away.”
DareDigger came to the front and added, “Every
one of them . . . never to return.”
Jepe was wide-eyed with curiosity and surprise.
“Do the experts have any idea why they all left?”
Chana pictograph on steleta:
Great boat [lakih-o poho] with billowing sails
DareDigger continued, “No. The writings just
say that they were all sailing away on great boats, all of
them, but we haven’t found anything that says where
they were going or why. NAH-chah hun-chah-NAH.
We don’t know. And we have no evidence from history
that they ever arrived anywhere after they left.
100
Secrets of the Steletae
“Oh, one other thing. You know the chá-nah
chá-nah birds? Of course you do. We all know them
well. It turns out they are lovebirds, and the calls we
hear are the lovebirds calling to each other. The Chana
people called them chanabirds. The Chana people believed that they themselves were similar to the lovebirds calling to each other. Love, kamoni, was the center of Chana life.”
The audience clapped and shouted gleefully.
A short man in his thirties stood up near the
front. “My persona is Bulgar, and I’m one of the food
people. Excuse me for asking, but how do we know all
this?”
DiggerLady continued, “Well, as Jepe mentioned, through computer-aided deciphering, the archaeological etymologists have been able to translate a
great deal of their writings. Also, as I mentioned, they
wrote on a fire-hardened clay, so what they wrote has
been almost completely preserved. Hardly any of the
steletae are broken. So we have a remarkably well preserved record.
“I should mention that many of the steletae have
pictographs on them. Some even have a sort of musical
notation that we are trying to unravel. There are some
musical groups here that are working with us in this area. They are attempting not only to translate the music
but they are also studying how to make the same instruments the Chana people used. We may have some
ancient indigenous music for you by the December solstice.”
At this, the people howled in eager excitement.
101
Kanatara—The Story
2003
DiggerLady continued. “I would now like to
introduce to you the head of our Tropical Medicine Research Team, Dr. Tropico.”
The crowd stood and applauded.
“Thank you, DiggerLady,” Dr. Tropico began.
“The reason I am standing before you, and the reason
DiggerLady has asked me to say a few words, is not
about the work we are doing on the northeast coast of
the island. There, we are researching tropical plants and
how they might be able to cure many of mankind’s diseases. There is an absolute wealth of unusual plants in
the rain and cloud forests. But what DiggerLady has
asked me to bring to you, since it is in the medical field,
is what the anthropologists have found about the medicine of the ancient Chana people.
“There is much in the steletae about their medicine, and in many ways, they were fairly advanced. I
just want to bring one small part of it to you. That has
to do with cataracts. A cataract is a clouding that develops in the lens of the eye leading to the obstruction of
the passage of light into the eye. In one sense, it is a
closing of the eye or eyes.
“The Chana people had discovered a plant they
called ushama that opens the eyes of those who eat the
plant. Although we can’t be certain that it was cataracts
that this plant was able to cure, we suspect that was the
case. The plant has been described quite well in their
writings, with many pictographs. We are hoping to find
this plant and do our own research in the hope of bringing relief to people with cataracts without the need for
surgery. The Chana people wrote extensively about this
‘opening of the eyes.’ Perhaps their genetic patterning
led them to be prone to cataracts. We don’t know. At
102
Secrets of the Steletae
any rate, the ‘opening of the eyes’ was somewhat important in the Chana culture.”
Dr. Tropico left the podium to sustained applause.
After the applause died down, Jepe came forward and asked another question, “What about their
religion? What did they believe, or do we know that?”
DiggerLady responded, “I think at this point I
will turn it over to our head of cultural anthropology,
Tribescope. He will be able to speak to what they believed about life and their place in it. Perhaps we could
call it their worldview. Let’s give a nice hand to
Tribescope.”
The crowd applauded as Tribescope went forward to the podium.
103
Kanatara—The Story
104
2003
12. WORLDVIEW OF THE CHANA PEOPLE
“Hello, all you good people out there!”
Tribescope began.
“Hello!” the audience responded.
“The Chana people had no religious rites, rituals, symbols, or ceremonies. Their festivals were not
religious in nature. Rather, their celebrations had to do
with the world around them—the new moons, the full
moons, the solstices, the equinoxes. We will hear about
that from Calendrico in a bit.
“They acknowledged a Great Spirit that guided
the stars, but had no name. They believed this Great
Spirit, the Uh-a-Muh-a Pohoh [OO-ah-MOO-ah poHOH], did not wish to be worshiped, but rather desired
the people to live exemplary lives of honesty, innocence, virtue, humility, generosity, and similar values.
With these values, the people could be strong on the
inside and gentle on the outside. They believed that just
as the stars allowed themselves to be guided by the
Great Spirit, the individual Chana people were to allow
the Great Spirit to guide them in their lives.
“The Chana people were very much aware of
the greater world around them. As you heard from
SpadeMan, they sent their boats all over the world.
They were a very well-traveled people for that day—at
least their voyagers were. These sailing voyagers gave
much information about the wider world to their people
as they returned from their voyages. The Chana people
105
Kanatara—The Story
2003
believed that everyone in the world has a purpose to
fulfill and a destiny to achieve. Fulfilling one’s purpose
in life will lead to achieving one’s destiny. Destiny is
where you are going. Your purpose is how you’re going
to get there.
“The Chana people believed that you chose your
destiny before coming to earth, or it was assigned to
you before or at the time of your birth. Then, as though
sealed in a bottle, that destiny was to be discovered and
achieved by you in your life. It was each person’s duty
to seek out and find that destiny. Just as you wouldn’t
expect to find diamonds lying around on the ground,
likewise, you wouldn’t expect to find your destiny just
lying around for the taking. You had to dig deep for it,
and when you found it, it would be worth more to you
than all the diamonds in the world. If you were not
seeking your destiny, you were not aligned with the
universe.
“The way to discover your purpose in life was
to makupoh, tune in, to the hakalo, the channel or beam
of the Great Spirit. Then, allowing yourself to be guided by the Great Spirit, you could achieve your destiny.
Having discovered your purpose in life, and moving
toward your destiny, you would be living the life of
your deepest dreams. They believed that this is what
life was all about and was the duty of every individual.
In order to tune in to the channel, you needed first to
live by the underlying laws of the universe.
“How did they believe that you could live the
life of your deepest dreams? Once you saw your purpose clearly, you could imagine it into existence by
constantly and continuously imagining it. They believed that your thoughts would actually become things,
106
Worldview of the Chana People
the things you think about. Your dreams would become
the themes of your life.
“You would speak your purpose into existence
by continuously speaking about it. You would act your
purpose into existence by constantly acting it out. You
could be anything you want, do anything you want,
have anything you want, as long as it was good.
“The underlying structure of the universe consisted not only of physical laws, but also spiritual laws.
Such laws as innocence, gentleness, purity, kindness,
and such, were just as much a part of the universe and
just as certain as the laws of light, and gravity, and the
motions of the stars. They believed that these principles
not only underlie humankind on the earth, but they are
the governing principles of the entire universe. It was
not possible to embody those values perfectly. But
those values were to be the direction of your life if you
wished to be on the channel of the Great Spirit. They
were not so much a place you arrived at, but were a direction you were heading.
“They believed it was up to each individual—
not the family, or the council of elders—to hear from
the Great Spirit and to develop and perfect each one’s
own guidance system for life. This guidance system
would be aligned with the navigational system of the
universe. One’s own internal guidance system was
one’s conscience and good character. They believed
that by aligning their lives with the inherent values of
the universe, the beam or channel of communication of
the Great Spirit would be open to them.
“The questions of why you are here and what is
your purpose in life, what is your destiny and how you
can live the exemplary life, would be answered by lis-
107
Kanatara—The Story
2003
tening to the Great Spirit. Sometimes they would listen
to a seashell in order to hear. Sometimes the Great Spirit would send messages in the clouds. They believed
that time spent in solitude was a way of hearing from
the Great Spirit.
“The Chana people believed that everything had
consequences. If you do not live by the underlying values of the universe, then your life will be full of confusion, pain, and perhaps even shocking events. In jumping off a very high cliff, you will experience the consequences of the law of gravity. In the same way, not living by the underlying values of the universe will result
in disastrous, catastrophic results. They saw themselves
as beautiful children lost in a garden. The Great Spirit
would help them find their way back to the perfect path.
“The Chana people believed that the Great Spirit desires a perfect universe, and one where there is free
will. Not only did each person have a destiny, they believed, but humankind as a whole has a destiny. Unless
all the Chana people were moving toward their own
individual destinies, then the Chana people as a whole
would not be fulfilling its purpose and moving toward
its destiny. Consequently, humankind would not be
moving toward its destiny. The Chana people believed
that we are all in this together—first the individual, then
the Chana people, then all the people of the world. Beyond that, the stars.
“The Great Spirit was like a gardener desiring to
make the most perfect garden possible. Just as a gardener helps each plant in the garden to have the water,
nutrients, and sunshine that are needed, the Great Gardener was interested in helping you fulfill your purpose
and achieve your destiny. Just as a gardener looks after
108
Worldview of the Chana People
his roses and a mother looks after her baby and protects
her children, so the Great Spirit tends and looks after
the universe. This was their belief.
“The Great Spirit distributed chanas to help
each person fulfill his or her purpose in life. Chanas
were the talents, imagination, genius, resources,
knowledge, wisdom, skills, dreams, vision, and all such
things that each person had. Some of a person’s chanas
were obvious. Others had to be developed. The distribution of chanas was not random. It was a specific distribution from the Great Spirit for fulfilling each person’s
purpose and achieving each person’s destiny.
“They also believed that they were to live with a
heart of thankfulness—being deeply and wonderfully
thankful—in all things. To be thankful for dark clouds
as well as for bright sunshine. Without clouds and
storms in your life, you won’t have rain to nourish the
soil.
“They believed the universe was in perfect balance, and that one had the capacity to upset the balance
of the universe by one’s own thoughts, words, or actions. On the other hand, being on the beam or channel
would keep the universe in balance. The Western perspective may be to say that I am just one of 7+ billion
people and that I have little effect in the grand scheme
of things. I am one drop in the ocean. What effect can I
possibly have? To the contrary, the Chana people believed that each individual affects the universe. Any
spark of negativity or any blossom of positive energy
affects the whole world, and even the universe beyond.
“‘Everyone’s destiny is equally important,’ they
would say, ‘but I am the only person responsible for
mine. It is my purpose that I am to fulfill, and it is my
109
Kanatara—The Story
2003
destiny that I am to achieve.’ They saw that they could
have control of their lives, instead of being buffeted by
the winds of chance. Life thus entailed great responsibility for each Chana person. At the same time, that
responsibility was saturated with a light-heartedness
and infused with a deep and tangible joy that gave their
lives an almost musical quality.
“Just as you are constantly moving toward your
purpose in life, the Great Spirit is also working on the
other side, moving things, shifting things, bringing
things about, things you could never, ever possibly
bring about yourself—always active to bring your
deepest dreams to fruition. You do your part, and the
Great Spirit does its part.
“Interestingly, they believed that no two people
ever see the same sunrise or sunset. Now, sunrises and
sunsets were very important to the Chana people because the Great Spirit gave messages to people in the
clouds. I think the Western perspective is that if you
and I are both looking at the sunrise from our balcony,
we are both seeing the same sunrise.
“But the Chana person would say that we are
not at all seeing the same sunrise. Each sunrise is specifically designed for the individual watching it. For
this reason, they could not possibly be the same. The
Western perspective sees a sunrise merely as a phenomenon of nature. There is nothing individual about it.
The Chana person believed that the sunrise he was seeing was designed especially for him, and that would
also be true for the neighbor looking at the same sunrise. Thus, the sunrises would be different, and the messages different. Everything was personal from the Great
110
Worldview of the Chana People
Spirit. Nothing was left to chance. Nothing was random.
“They also believed that if there was a beautiful
sunrise or a beautiful sunset and you didn’t watch it,
you were missing the gift and the message. When possible, the Chana people wanted to sleep where they
could see the stars, so they could be watching, even in
their sleep, how the stars were being guided.
“Do you have any questions?”
A tall man with a couple of pineapples in his
hands raised one of the pineapples, and asked, “You
said the Chana people had no religion, but what you
described sounds to me like a religion. I don’t quite understand. Oh, by the way, my persona is Raker. I work
with food production.”
“Thank you, Raker, and a very good question,”
Tribescope began. “I think we have to distinguish between the spiritual, a personal connection with the
Great Spirit, as the Chana people would say, and religion, which tends to be an organized set of beliefs that
come down to an individual from some authority, be
that a book or an organization.
“The Chana people had a deep spirituality, but
they had no organized body of beliefs. Each person was
to be led as an individual by the Great Spirit. It was
most important for him to have his own understanding
of the Great Spirit, even if that differed from family or
community as a whole. Remember, he was to develop
his own navigational system for life. Perhaps we would
say, a bottom-up spirituality rather than a top-down religion. Thank you for your question. It was a good one.
“Just following up on that a bit, each person was
to be independent and was expected to think on his or
111
Kanatara—The Story
2003
her own. Following the community or one’s family was
not as important as each individual listening to and following the direction of the Great Spirit. In the field of
anthropology, we often come across tribes of people
where the individual completely disappears within the
tribe and does not exist—only the tribe exists. The individual does not have a separate identity. The Chana
people were just the opposite. They had a strong personal identity and a strong desire to live by what they
termed ‘proper principles.’
“I’ll take another question, and then I will turn it
back to DiggerLady.”
Persona Texan raised his hand and asked, “I
have another question. How many Chana people were
there, anyway?”
“We don’t know for sure,” Tribescope went on.
“As best we can determine there were more than
100,000 Chana people. The Chana society was tribal,
classless, and egalitarian. It was predominantly monogamous. The community was tight-knit and centered
around the life of the family. Decisions of the community were made by a council of older people, mostly
men, but also women. Harmony, transparency, and innocence between members of the society, were held to
be extremely important values—so important that
members could be ostracized for failing to uphold these
values in their personal lives.
“Also, the three ruins we have excavated indicate that there are a great many ruins all over the island
yet to be discovered. With the clues in the steletae, we
should be able to find most all of them over time.”
As DiggerLady came forward, Tribescope
handed her his microphone. The crowd stood and gave
112
Worldview of the Chana People
him an extended applause as he left the front and receded into the crowd.
“It is obvious you are finding all of this very exciting,” DiggerLady continued. “Musical notations,
sailing away on great boats, the Great Spirit guiding the
stars and the Chana people. Well, there is another aspect of all this that I think you will find just as enticing.
In fact, you will be able to participate!
“But for that, we are going to take a long break
and come back early this evening. This will give you a
chance to enjoy your day, kick around on the beach,
have a nap, and come back refreshed. See you then!”
Everybody headed to the white sand beach for surfing,
snorkeling, scuba diving, swimming, boating, windsurfing, and continuing the solstice celebration.
113
Kanatara—The Story
114
2003
Skip the next two chapters unless you’re a serious
student of Chana culture.
Just go to Chapter 15, Andromeda Cruise Ship.
115
Kanatara—The Story
116
2003
13. SPEAK A LITTLE CHANA
The crowd returned late afternoon and watched
the sun go down. It had been a good, very relaxing day.
DiggerLady came to the front and greeted the crowd as
it was settling down. “Hello, everybody. Welcome
back! I think you’re really going to like what’s coming
up!” She waved her arms up and down. “As I said before, you will be able to participate!
“A particularly interesting part of our digs has
been working with the archaeological etymologists who
have been able to break the code of the writings of this
ancient culture using computer deciphering at Harvard
by Internet. Linguistic archaeologists are in agreement
that we now know a great deal about the language of
the people who lived on Kanatara long ago. As the language was being deciphered, a list of words and expressions used by the Chana people was developed. We
have put together an abridged glossary of words and
phrases for you. We are going to project it onto large
screens in front of you.”
Several men jumped up and arranged two large
screens before the crowd. Two young women operated
two computer projectors, projecting the glossary onto
the screens so everyone could see it.
Please see Appendix for Glossary of Chana language.
“I want to remind you that once Marion had discovered the ruins at Kanahana, she wanted to learn to
117
Kanatara—The Story
2003
speak the language of these people. A number of you
have also expressed interest in speaking the Chana language. We will be having some classes for you. Who
knows, we may all end up speaking Chana!
“One very useful word is KOH-hoh, which
means Hello. Chah-LAH can also be used for Hello, but
it is also used for Good-bye, Thank you, and You’re
welcome, and is thus a general expression. KOH-hoh,
on the other hand, is more specific and is stronger and
more likely to be used among friends and family.
“Now, after I say, KOH-hoh to you, that is, Hello, the next thing I might say to you if I were speaking
to you personally would be, AH-nah PAH-kee? That
would be, How are you? If I were speaking to a group
of you, as I am now, I would say, PAH-nah PAH-kee?
This would mean, How are you all?
“So, let’s practice. I say, KOH-hoh. Say after
me, KOH-hoh.”
“KOH-hoh!” The audience repeated.
“Now, How are you? AH-nah PAH-kee? Say
after me, AH-nah PAH-kee?”
“AH-nah PAH-kee?” The audience smiled, and
repeated it after her.
“Very good,” DiggerLady went on. “It’s easy
isn’t it? You’re speaking Chana—probably the first
time in maybe a thousand years that anyone has spoken
Chana.
“Now, what do you answer someone when they
ask you, AH-nah PAH-kee? Well, how about, I am
good? That would be like saying, I am fine. So that’s
easy, too. Just say, OH-noh KAH-mah. OH-noh is ‘I’
and KAH-mah is ‘good.’
“So, can you say after me, OH-noh KAH-mah?”
118
Speak a Little Chana
“OH-noh KAH-mah!” the crowd said loudly
with growing enthusiasm.
“Now, if you want to say, We are good or We
are fine, you would say, POH-noh KAH-mah. OH-noh
is ‘I,’ singular, and POH-noh is ‘we,’ plural. Just like
AH-nah is ‘you,’ singular, and PAH-nah is ‘you all,’
plural.
“So if I ask you, PAH-nah PAH-kee? How are
you all? What do you answer me?”
“POH-noh KAH-mah!” The crowd responded
enthusiastically.
“Excellent! You are a good class!” DiggerLady
smiled and waved her arms.
“Finally, I think you need to know how to say,
‘Yes’ and ‘No.’ Well, TAH is ‘Yes,’ and NAH-chah is
‘No.’ Quite easy, isn’t it?”
“TAH!” the audience agreed.
“Good. You’re catching on quite quickly.
“OK, now let’s learn a little grammar. We may
all have some memories of how grammar was difficult.”
The audience moaned.
“Well, in Chana, grammar is quite easy. But before we get into grammar, let’s talk about the sounds.
There are just four vowel sounds and ten consonant
sounds. For starters, that makes everything a lot easier.
The vowel sounds are a (AH), o (OH), i (EE), and u
(OO). That’s it. The consonants are g, h, k, l, m, n, p, r,
t, ch, and sh. That’s it. No more.
“Now, almost all nouns have the stress on the
next to last syllable. That makes it easy, huh? Most all
verbs have the stress on the last syllable. That makes it
easy, too. Nouns change into verbs by changing the
119
Kanatara—The Story
2003
stress. Am I losing some of you? OK, I’ll give you an
example. The word kupani (koo-PAH-nee) is the noun
for a talk or a speech. Kupanih (koo-pah-NEE) is to
give a talk or a speech. So you can always just change a
noun into a verb, or vice versa, by changing the stress
of the word. One exception is chalah (cha-LAH), which
means hello, thank you, good-bye, you’re welcome, and
some other things, too! Well, actually, maybe those are
like verbs!” She laughed.
“Now, if you’ve ever tried to learn a foreign
language, you know that tenses, past, present, future,
give you all kinds of trouble. In Chana, it’s so easy! For
the past tense, just add the word huko (HOO-koh) after
the verb. Kupanih huko (koo-pah-NEE HOO-koh), I
talked, or I gave a speech. How could it be any easier!
For the future tense, you just add nuhuno (noo-HOOnoh) after the verb. Kupanih nuhuno (koo-pah-NEE
noo-HOO-noh), I will talk or I will give a speech. So
much for verb tenses. That’s all there is to it. Do I hear
a big sigh of relief?”
“Yes,” the audience sighed.
“Now, to make a noun plural, just add mah
(MAH) after the noun. Huno (HOO-noh) is friend. Huno-mah (HOO-noh-MAH) is friends, plural. Also, there
are no personal articles, a, an, or the. That makes things
easier, too.
“Adjectives can come before or after a noun; for
example, ‘good man’ or ‘man good.’ Adverbs can come
before or after a verb; for example, ‘to run strong’ or
‘strong to run.’ A Chana adjective and a Chana adverb
are usually the same word. This makes things easier,
too.
120
Speak a Little Chana
“One other helpful point is that when a word is
spelled out, you will stress any vowel that has an ‘h’
after it. You see up there on the screen the word ‘chalah.’ If it weren’t for this little rule, you might pronounce the word CHA-lah, stressing the next-to-last
syllable, which would be wrong. Because that ‘h’ is
there, it tells you to stress the last syllable. So that little
‘h’ after a vowel, which you’ll see all over the place,
tells you to stress that syllable.
“I expect we’ll hear a lot of Chana around the
island now that we have the glossary. We have printed
some up for you, and they are here at the front. And
we’ll be having classes.”
121
Kanatara—The Story
122
2003
14. CALENDAR AND NUMBERS
OF THE ANCIENT CHANA PEOPLE
“Well, I think we’ve learned enough Chana for
right now. So, I’d like to move on to another aspect of
Chana culture.” A gentleman with flowing white hair
came forward and smiled at DiggerLady, holding out
his hand. They shook hands, and she embraced him
with a kiss on the cheek.
“This is Calendrico. He is a cultural anthropologist. He has been studying the ancient Chana calendar.
Would you like to hear about that?”
“Tah!* Tah!” the crowd exclaimed in agreement.
Calendrico took the mike. “The nanah-o (naNAH-oh) Chana, the Chana people, had a simple solar/lunar calendar. The year was divided into quarters,
and the four quarters were divided into six moons, three
new moons and three full moons. The four quarters of
the year were the times between the long day, or summer, solstice in December, which began the year; the
fall, or decreasing, equinox in March; the short day, or
winter, solstice in June; and the spring, or increasing,
*
It will be the convention in this book to translate a Chana word in a footnote the first time it appears in a chapter (unless otherwise translated).
Tah! … Yes!
123
Kanatara—The Story
2003
equinox in September. The year began at the long day,
or winter, solstice.
“Solstices were great times of celebration. They
celebrated all night and all day. The equinoxes, on the
other hand, were times of quiet contemplation and singing. They talked about the progress they had made since
the last solstice and the progress they expected to make
before the next solstice. It was a time of looking inside
oneself and seeing where one had not lived up to the
values of the universe since the last solstice and how
one expected to do better by the next solstice. The winter solstice was a time to start great things, such as sea
voyages to go around the world.
“The full moons were times of all-night celebrations. The new moons, which began when the first sliver of new moon could be seen, were times of beginnings—beginning of planting, beginning a journey, beginning a life together through marriage. New moons
were also a time of teaching, such as teaching boys to
fish and girls to make clothing. The way to say new
moon is little moon, kilo-icha (KEE-loh EE-chah). The
way to say full moon is big moon, kilo-poho (KEE-loh
POH-hoh). New moons and equinoxes were also the
time when the council of elders, the wisdom circle, met.
Please see Appendix for Chana calendar.
“An especially favorable time was when a new
or full moon came at the same time as one of the solstices or equinoxes. Another especially favorable time
was the fourth new moon or full moon in a quarter. This
would not happen very often. The next especially favorable time, if any of you are planning on marrying . . .”
The crowd chuckled.
124
Calendar and Numbers of the Ancient Chana People
“. . . would be in March of next year. On March
20, you will have the decreasing, or fall, equinox, and
you will also have a new moon. Some of you are looking a little puzzled, especially some of you newcomers.
Why would the fall equinox come in March? Who
knows the answer?”
A twelve year old raised his hand near the front
of the crowd. “Yes, my son,” responded Calendrico.
“Because we are south of the equator and everything is backwards.” The crowd laughed.
“Yes, my son,” Calendrico answered, “you are
right. I don’t know that everything is backwards here,”
he smiled. “Maybe it is backwards north of the equator.”
The crowd laughed again.
“Now,” Calendrico continued, “I’m going to
give you some Chana words for these various times of
the year. I’m not going to test you on these. . . .”
The crowd chuckled.
“Okay,” Calendrico began, “Shama (SHAHmah) is solstice. And now a couple of words that you
will need to know for other uses. Ku (KOO) is the
Chana word for short. And kuh-o (KOO-oh) is the
Chana word for long. So, for the short day, winter, solstice with the shortest day of the year (in June), you say
shama-ku (SHAH-mah KOO). For the long day, summer, solstice (in December) with the longest day of the
year, that starts out the new year, you say shama-kuh-o
(SHAH-mah KOO-oh). That isn’t hard, is it?”
“Nacha,*” the crowd answered.
*
Nacha … No
125
Kanatara—The Story
2003
“Okay,” Calendrico continued, “all we have left
are the equinoxes. The word for equinox is kalo-hapo
(KAH-loh-HAH-poh). Again we have a couple of
words that will be useful for other things. The word for
growth or increase in Chana is umuh-o (oo-MOO-oh)
and the word for decreasing or shrinking is umu (OOmoo). We now add those together, and we have the fall
or decreasing equinox as kalo-hapo-umu (KAH-lohHAH-poh-OO-moo) and the spring or increasing equinox as kalo-hapo-umuh-o (KAH-loh-HAH-poh-ooMOO-oh) . Maybe not as easy as the solstices were, but
not too hard.
“Now, here is something that is a lot easier. One
thing that is pretty easy in the Chana language is the
numbers. Just remember ‘a (AH), o (OH), i (EE).’ Ka
(KAH) is 1, ka ka is 2, and ka ka ka is 3. That’s pretty
easy isn’t it? That was ‘a (AH).’ Now, start over with ‘o
(OH),’ Ko (KOH) is 4, ko ko is 5, and ko ko ko is 6.
Now start over with ‘i (EE).’ Ki (KEE) is 7, ki ki is 8,
and ki ki ki is 9. Starting with ‘a (AH),’ cha (CHAH) is
10. Cha cha is 20, cha cha cha is 30. Now going to ‘o
(OH),’ cho (CHOH) is 40, cho cho is 50 and cho cho
cho is 60. Then going to ‘i (EE),’ chi (CHEE) is 70, chi
chi is 80, chi chi chi is 90. You see how it works? It’s
easy isn’t it?
“Kala (KAH-lah) is a 100. Lama (LAH-mah) is
a 1,000. Ka ka is 2 and lama is 1,000, so ka ka lama is
2,000. Lama lama is also 2,000. Ko ko is 5 and lama is
1,000 so ko ko lama is 5,000. How to do 7,010? Ki is 7,
lama is 1,000 plus 10 is cha, so ki lama cha would be
7,010. See how easy that is? Ten thousand would be
cha for 10 and lama for 1,000, cha lama. Chi chi is 80
so chi chi lama would be 80,000. Kala lama would be
126
Calendar and Numbers of the Ancient Chana People
100,000. Ko ko kala lama would be 500,000. Palaka
(pah-LAH-kah) is a million. Cho palaka would be 40
million and so on. Once you get the knack, it’s easier
than just about any other language there is.
“And you can count all the way to 999,999,999:
ki ki ki kala chi chi chi ki ki ki palaka, ki ki ki kala chi
chi chi ki ki ki lama, ki ki ki kala chi chi chi ki ki ki. But
don’t worry, you won’t need to do that. They didn’t
have a word for billion, but of course you could say lama palaka, a thousand million, and continue counting
indefinitely.
Please see Appendix for Chana Numbers.
“Thank you very much, Calendrico,” DiggerLady took the mike. “Let’s give Calendrico a nice round
of applause.” The audience stood up and gave him a
resounding applause.
“Now,” DiggerLady continued, “as I said before, we have some printed glossaries up here for you to
take with you and learn some Chana. There will also be
a signup list for those of you who want to take classes.
From what we have learned so far, I can tell you this—
life is more fun, the more Chana you can speak. It’s not
difficult. As we have seen, unlike most languages in the
world, Chana has some peculiarities that make it quite
easy to learn.
It was time for the gathering to end. Jepe now
took the mike and bid the crowd good-bye. “Chalah!*”
All the crowd rose and answered, “Chalah!”
“Have a Chana night!” Jepe shouted to the crowd slowly leaving Butterfly Grove.
*
Chalah! … Good-bye!
127
Kanatara—The Story
2003
And this was the end of the June solstice gathering.
128
15. ANDROMEDA CRUISE SHIP
At the December solstice, the people stayed up
all night and celebrated on the beach in the usual fashion with bonfires, singing, dancing, and imbibing kava.
The chanabirds and the fireflies joined in the celebration.
As it grew toward midnight, a group of musicians began playing with handmade instruments they
had made following the instructions on the steletae. A
crowd gathered around them.
David spoke to the crowd. “These musicians
have been working with the archaeologists. Together,
they have worked out, or translated, the notations on
some of the steletae. They have some indigenous music
for you from long ago. The instruments they will use
are those that the Chana musicians would have used in
the ancient past.
“Some of the notations on the steletae indicate
that people sang along with the musicians. So our musicians will also add a vocal accompaniment. You can
add your voices, too.”
One of the musicians, whose persona was Musico, began speaking. “Koho, ono kama hani-mah ah
hana-mah!” Then he repeated in English, “Hello, my
good brothers and sisters.”
129
Kanatara—The Story
2003
“Koho!*” the audience responded.
Some in the crowd added, “Ono kama huni”
“Would you like to learn an ancient song of the
Chana people?” Musico asked with a big smile on his
face.
“Tah! Tah!” the crowd responded.
“I will sing it first in Chana and then translate.”
He began to sing as the musicians played their instruments. “Takanoh Uh-a-Muh-a Pohoh tani-mah.” He
sang the verse several times. The audience was swaying
and dancing slowly to the music.
“Now,” Musico went on, “I’ll translate it for
you. ‘The Great Spirit guides the stars.’ Apparently the
Chana people could sing this one verse for quite a long
time during their solstice celebrations. I know in the
cultures where most of us came from, we’re not used to
singing one verse over and over again. But let’s try it.”
And they did, continuing to dance and sway to the music.
“Let’s try another one. Kanatara kapono alu tali
ah umuh-o. That means, ‘Kanatara is movement toward
light and growth.’ We’re not quite sure what they meant
by that. But from what we heard from Tribescope, it
probably had to do with the destiny of the island and
the Chana people. He sang the verse over and over as
the audience swayed slowly back and forth, adding
their voices to the music.
The musicians continued to play until a slight
crescent moon came up not long before dawn.
*
Koho! … Hello!
Ono kama huni … My good man
Tah! … Yes!
130
Andromeda Cruise Ship
The next morning everyone met at Butterfly
Grove under the mango trees in front of Kahali Bay.
David stood before the crowd. “Pana paki, ono
kama hani-mah ah hana-mah?” Then he repeated in
English, “How are you all, my good brothers and sisters?”
The crowd responded, “Pono kama, pono
*
hani! ”
David continued, “We want to welcome you to
the fourth December solstice celebration on Kanatara.
Solstice celebrations are a time for making announcements and letting people know all the good things that
have been going on here on the island.
“At this time of celebration, I want to announce
that some of our scientists working on the level of the
electron, those who developed hydrogen-e, have now
succeeded in isolating carbon-e. We now have an extremely accurate way of dating ancient materials.”
The crowd stood up and applauded this development.
Doug stood at the front and added, “Obviously,
the archaeologists are very excited about this.”
David continued, “Well, we have been speaking
with the team of archaeological engineers and, using
carbon-e, they have determined the age of the ruins of
Kanatara. But I think it only fair that DiggerLady
should be the one to make the announcement. DiggerLady, please come forward.”
DiggerLady came to the front. “Hi, everybody!”
“Hi!” the audience responded.
*
Pono kama, pono hani! … We are good, our brother!
131
Kanatara—The Story
2003
“Well,” DiggerLady exclaimed, “to be brief and
to the point, the ruins at Kanatara are more than . . . are
you ready for this?”
“Tah! Tah! We’re ready!” the crowd exclaimed.
“They are more than . . . ” DiggerLady waved
her arms up in the air and began to dance around. “. . .
ka ka lama years old! Ka ka lama!”
Someone in the crowd called out, “That’s two
thousand!”
“Yes,” DiggerLady shouted. “More than two
thousand years old. Previously, we never thought we
had found anything that old.”
The crowd exploded in revelry. They began
dancing around and chanting, “Pono nanah-o Chana!*
Pono nanah-o Chana! Pono nanah-o Chana!”
After the crowd settled down, David was able to
continue addressing the crowd. “And these archaeologists are placing the Chana departure, if we can call it
that, at about two thousand years ago.”
Doug raised his hands in an expression of delight. “And they were building their great boats for the
fifty years before that.”
It was a time for more announcements. Jepe
went to the front. “We now have a population of over
800 people on Kanatara. Neutramica production is
greatly expanding. And, by the way, those working at
the base where we produce all the Neutramica decided
to name their base Neutrakana and the bay where the
ships are launched, Neutrakana Bay.
“Construction has begun on Port Kahali, the
Monorail, and the great hotel where newcomers will
*
Pono nanah-o Chana! … We are the Chana people!
132
Andromeda Cruise Ship
live when they arrive. We are calling this hotel the
Grand Kahali Hotel. More about all of these later.
“On a bit of a somber note, it is rumored that a
group decided to sail to this island on their own and
were lost in the Barrier Storms. In talking with the press
and the news media on my last trip to San Diego, I
urged a warning. ‘Please don’t try to go to the island on
your own. You’ll never make it. Just be patient, please.
In the next several years, we’ll try to get everyone safely to the island—everyone who wants to go there.’”
David took the microphone. “Most of you have
personas, leaving your old names behind. But those of
us who made the first trip to the island back in 2000—
we are still not using personas, and I don’t know why.
But today, that has changed. I’m now Kanadave. Come
up here, honey. My wife is now Kanajulia.”
“Tah! Tah!” the crowd cried out in agreement.
Doug and Marion walked to the front as the
crowd applauded. “I’m Kanadoug, and my wife is
Kanamarion.”
“Tah! Tah!” the crowd was jubilant.
Jepe went forward with his wife, who took a
microphone. “From now on, I’m Kanashelly.”
“Tah! Tah!” The crowd applauded.
David, now Kanadave, took the microphone
again and said, “One of the more important announcement we have at this December solstice celebration is
this: A large group of newcomers, about 540 to be exact, will arrive on January 1. They will arrive on the
Andromeda, our first cruise ship.”
The crowd went wild, throwing flowers in the
air and shouting “Tah! Tah! … Tah! Tah … Tah! Tah!”
133
Kanatara—The Story
2003
“For the first time,” Kanadave continued, “the
Barrier Storms will be exciting but not death-defying.
Everyone now on the island—you are the last ones to
have gone through the Barrier Storms in a sailing vessel. You are the veterans, and all your lives, you will be
a special group. There is no group like you anywhere
on earth. And I myself will never ever forget going
through the Barrier Storms that first time.”
The crowd was a bit sober, remembering having
gone through those storms, staring into the jaws of
death, seeing their certain doom. Now, they hugged and
kissed each other. Some had faces wet with tears. This
was, in a sense, the end of an era. From now on, newcomers could enjoy Kanatara without risking their lives.
“Now,” Kanadave went on, “let me tell you
something about our new cruise ship. During the last
six months, it has been tested, first in the calm waters
around the island. Then, after two months of this testing, it was taken through the Barrier Storms. It tested
very well. Then it went out into the Pacific and was
tested thoroughly, visiting various islands in the South
Pacific. It attracted quite a bit of attention at the ports
we visited. Then it came back for substantial testing
through the Barrier Storms, going through a total of six
times. After some minor adjustments, it handled perfectly.
“About 130 of you attended the launching ceremony at Neutrakana Bay. It was a lovely event and the
champagne breaking on the bow of the ship will not
soon be forgotten.
“It is not a large cruise ship. It will carry 540
passengers. It seemed better to start out with a smaller
ship, and then build bigger ones. The ship now on the
134
Andromeda Cruise Ship
drafting table—the Andromeda 1500—will carry 1,500
passengers. Then our largest ship, the Andromeda 3000,
will carry 3,000. But for now, this one will meet our
needs. This ship will travel at 18 knots (33 km), with
the next larger ones traveling at 26 knots (48 km) and
30 knots (56 km). This smaller ship has super-sized ballasts and stabilizers. These slow the ship down. The
larger ships planned for the future will be able to travel
at the faster speeds because they will not go through the
Barrier Storms.”
“Not go through the Barrier Storms? Why
not?” the crowd murmured to themselves. They were
puzzled.
“Ultimately, the plan is to have a pilot ship, specially designed with super-sized ballasts and stabilizers,
to ferry newcomers from the cruise ships through the
Barrier Storms and then to the island. This will be a
very comfortable trip where the passengers can enjoy
the incredible storms you have all been through. They
will enjoy the spectacle in complete comfort. Until
then, however, the Andromeda cruise ship will be a
rough trip through the storms, even though most people
will not be frightened.
“When we have the pilot ship, the cruise ships
won’t need those super-sized ballasts and stabilizers
that slow them down. They can go at normal speed,
picking up passengers from ports all over the world.
“This first ship is somewhat spartan. Later ships
will increase in comfort and luxury. The final ship,
about as large as any cruise ships in the world, will also
be about as luxurious as any cruise ship in the world.
Our food production people will be in charge of the
menus. Although this first ship will have a very tasty
135
Kanatara—The Story
2003
menu, the Andromeda 1500 and the Andromeda 3000
will have luxurious menus. Of course, all the food will
be from the island or caught in the surrounding waters.
“Musical groups here on the island will be invited to go on the Andromeda voyages to serenade the
newcomers. This will give them a feeling for the island
long before they get here.”
Kanadoug took the microphone and said, “Let’s
give a terrific round of applause to those who have designed and built the first Andromeda!”
“Tah! Tah!” The crowd burst into applause and
it was some time before they settled down again.
“And, finally,” Kanadave said, “as you are
probably aware, we now have a pier for the Andromeda
to dock at when she comes into port.” Kanadave
stepped aside.
“Oh, and by the way,” Kanadoug took a microphone and explained, “for all of you musicians, we are
putting together an orchestra to meet the newcomers at
the new pier when they arrive. All of you who might be
interested, please see persona Musico. Musico, would
you raise your hand so everybody can see you? Okay,
there’s Musico, and all you musicians who want to participate in the welcoming orchestra, please just see Musico.”
“Now, we all wish you chalah!* Have a Chana
day!”
After more applause, mingled with “chalah,”
the crowd dispersed to enjoy the blue, blue water and
the white sand beach, surfing, swimming, snorkeling,
*
chalah! … good-bye!
136
Andromeda Cruise Ship
windsurfing, and napping under the swaying coconut
palms. It had been a very good year.
137
Kanatara—The Story
138
2003
2004
16. FIRST STROLL ON KANATARA
It was January 1. In a sense, this was the climax
of three years of hard work, preparing the island for the
people who would come. Of course, it was a most special occasion for the newcomers, but for those who had
braved the Barrier Storms in sailing vessels and worked
to develop the island, it was icing on the cake.
The sunset had been beautiful as the Andromeda
sailed into Kahali Bay and docked at the new pier at
Port Kahali. All the passengers were milling about on
deck, enjoying the tropical breezes blowing gently
across the ship. Before any newcomers disembarked,
Kanadave, Kanadoug, and Jepe went aboard the ship
and asked the newcomers to assemble in the large dining room.
Kanadave took the microphone and began.
“Katana Puna Nanah-o. Welcome New People.” The
audience smiled and talked a little among themselves.
“Now, would you all like to say, ‘Thank you’?”
“Yes,” the newcomers agreed.
“That’s simple. Just say, Chalah.*”
“Chalah!” the crowd said with enthusiasm.
*
Chalah … Thank you.
139
Kanatara—The Story
2004
“Now, you can speak Chana!” The crowd
laughed. “You’ll be speaking a lot more of it as you get
acquainted with the island.”
Kanadoug took the mike. “Before you disembark to our beautiful island, we want to prepare you a
little for your grand adventure.” The audience moved
about in their seats. “Most of this we told you before
you signed up to come, so there won’t be much new
here.
“First of all, most of you have probably never
been in a place of almost complete peace and harmony.
People who are not used to harmony, not used to working together in harmony, may find it necessary to make
some adjustments in how you think and how you act.”
The audience tittered.
“You will want to get into the spirit of Kanatara.
We hope that our island spirit will be contagious and
that all of you will embrace it. However, if someone
doesn’t fit into this, that is not a problem. Nachana,
which means, ‘It doesn’t matter.’ We can take the person back to the ship and wait for its departure. When
the ship leaves to pick up other new people, this person
will be returned to his or her port of embarcation. We
will offer you a fond farewell, tinged with sadness that
you couldn’t appreciate our island. But, nachana, it
doesn’t matter.
“You will notice a brilliant clarity here. You
will be able to see your life in a new and different perspective. You may notice that you can see your ego
more clearly here. You may even realize what a false
and artificial thing it is—not the real you. You will find
that this island gives you a sort of inner strength.
140
First Stroll on Kanatara
“Over time, this island will show you the fundamental issues of your life, and it will give you the
understanding needed to successfully navigate those
waters. You will have a much greater understanding of
your purpose in life and your destiny.
“This may seem like a pretty tall order, but we
have been here more than three years, and we know
what we are talking about. The wonderful thing about
this island is that all these changes will be soft. If you
just relax and let go, you will find yourself falling in
love with the depth of understanding you will have
here. Let yourself fall in love with whatever other dimension we may be in touch with here. If you sense a
presence, something you’ve never felt before, just relax
and roll with the flow. The island will help you.”
Kanadave took the mike again. “You are all
Kanatarans now. You are joining the Kanatara culture
and leaving your old culture behind. You are no longer
Singaporeans, Moroccans, or French. You are Kanatarans. No longer Tibetans, Chinese, or Sri Lankans. You
are Kanatarans. No longer Russians, Brazilians, or
Czechs. You are now Kanatarans. No longer Malaysians, Americans, or Rwandese. You have new brothers
and sisters—a new family. In a way, dawn is just breaking over Kanatara. You are here at the beginning—
explorers into the future, being led by your imaginations. You have an amazing adventure ahead of you.
The journey awaits you. Come enjoy your new life on
Kanatara.”
The newcomers applauded with enthusiasm.
“Kanatara is for all the people of the world.
Kanatara is a place where you can live the life you always wanted to live. True joy and true success is falling
141
Kanatara—The Story
2004
in love with your purpose in life once you discover
what it is. Make your dreams the fixed star on which
you chart your course. Where are you steering your
ship? Think about the significance of your purpose on
planet earth.
“Kanatara is a geography where the impossible
becomes possible. Here you have a launching pad for
merging your radiant mind and the light of your genius
with the brilliance of others. Give your imagination free
rein. Kanatara is a fresh breeze blowing across the
planet.”
The crowd of newcomers applauded again.
“Dare to dream large dreams. Nothing is impossible if it is in your destiny. Under the brilliant blue
skies of our days and the star-studded skies of our
nights is movement toward light and growth. Our
dreams are the first rays of a new dawn. We are mapping invisible landscapes. We welcome you with all our
hearts. Come enjoy your new life on Kanatara!”
The crowd applauded with anticipation as
Kanadave gave Jepe a warm embrace and handed him
the microphone.
Jepe took the microphone and began. “Yes, all
of us really do welcome you. You are in for such a
great life—an adventure that you can only dimly imagine.
“Now, I believe you have all chosen personas
for your new life on Kanatara. Most of you have also
chosen your vocational preference. As you know, on
Kanatara no one is required to work. Some of you may
need a vacation from your past life, and a few of you
may even need quite a long vacation. That is just fine.
Nachana. It doesn’t matter. There are plenty of people
142
First Stroll on Kanatara
to do the work. But at some point, it is likely that you
will want to join with others in the continuing service to
the people and development of the island. The most fun
and fulfillment will come from contributing to the joy
and happiness of others.
“You are also free to change your vocational
specialty. There is food production and food service,
including the food service for the Grand Kahali Hotel
and the Andromeda cruise ship. There is transportation,
which includes the Monorail and the Andromeda. There
is Neutramica production. There is factory production
for such items as tractors and carts, earth-movers, as
well as bicycles, pedicycles, refrigerators, and stoves.
There are four construction gangs: one for the
Monorail, one for hiking and bicycle roads and paths,
one for major developments such as the Grand Kahali
Hotel and our central city, and one for the smaller residential developments all over the island. There is research and development, and there is tropical medicine.
“All of you will likely laze around for a while
before wanting to begin work. We hope so. Take a couple of weeks to get to know the place, meet lots of people, swim, snorkel, go boating, whatever. Relax into the
island.
“Are there any questions?”
“A handsome man that looked like he might be
a businessman raised his hand and asked, “What does it
mean to say someone is Chana? She is very Chana, or
that is Chana?”
“That means something like . . . technological
and cool and relaxed. In the flow of earth and stars.
Walking softly on the earth.
“Are there any other questions?”
143
Kanatara—The Story
2004
A woman with blue ribbons in her hair stood up
and asked, “What should I do with my luggage?”
Kanadoug answered, “That is a good question.
You will be staying in your staterooms at night so leave
your luggage there. But you are free to leave the ship
and return anytime you wish. When your rooms are
available in the Grand Kahali Hotel, we will have porters to move all your belongings to the hotel. Until then,
you will be taking your meals aboard ship.
“Any other questions?”
A youngster about nine raised his hand. “Is it
true there are monkeys on the island?”
Kanadave stepped up. “Yes, my son, there are
monkeys on the island. Very friendly ones, too, I might
add.”
Jepe took the mike, “If there are no more questions, please take your time going down the gangway.
And don’t forget the midnight ribbon-cutting ceremony
in a few hours. We will cut the ribbon for the opening
of the first mile of rail of the Silent Bullet, our Monorail
under construction.”
The newcomers stepped off the Andromeda
cruise ship to the sounds of a forty-piece orchestra,
welcoming them. These new Kanatara residents were
from all over the world, disembarking for their first
stroll on Kanatara. An Arab in her burka, an Indian
woman in her sari, a south sea islander, a gaucho with
his poncho in hand, a man in a business suit. Saints and
sages, perhaps, but dentists, truck drivers, little old ladies, students, techies, sheepherders, and pottery makers. From wherever they came, they walked down the
gangplank with awe and excitement written all over
their faces.
144
First Stroll on Kanatara
For some it was the fulfillment of a life-long
dream, to come and live on a tropical island. For others
it was a spur of the moment decision. But all agreed on
one thing—living in Kanatara would be an extraordinary adventure. With champagne, Roman candles, and
warm breezes off the bay, they were welcomed by the
Kanatara Welcome Committee. A big sign said “Katana Puna Nanah-o.” Those newcomers were already
learning some Chana. They knew the sign said, “Welcome New People.”
The ship had arrived at about 8 p.m. By 9 p.m.
everyone was in the port town of Port Kahali. Reporters
for the Morning Post, Kanatara’s newspaper, approached a young couple and asked what they expected
from their new life in Kanatara.
With the sounds of the orchestra wafting over
them, the young man answered, “Well, we listen to the
sounds of the night birds and feel the fresh warm breezes from the bay. . . . If this first tropical night is any indication, we expect a great life, lots of friends and not
very many problems. There was a long waiting list. We
were really glad we were able to come.”
The young woman went on. “We expect an
awesome life, sharing our talents and expertise to help
develop the island. It’s not enough just to have a good
life. One needs purpose in life, and that will be possible
on Kanatara. Maybe even discover our destiny. The
new technologies we’ve heard about are exciting.
We’re ready for a new life. Open to anything."
“Do you know what you’ll be doing here?” the
reporter continued.
“Yes, my husband and I have volunteered for
the administration section of the Monorail construction
145
Kanatara—The Story
2004
gang. We’re really looking forward to getting to work.
For us, the beach can wait. We can do that on the weekend.”
“Well, honey,” her husband interjected, “this is
Thursday. I don’t think we can begin until Monday.”
“Oh, okay,” she responded. “Monday will be
fine.”
A reporter went over to a young girl with her
parents and asked her what she thought of Kanatara.
“It’s very tara* here. I learned a little Chana before I
came. It’s tara here and also ulumi in the uh-a-muh-a.”
“Say,” responded the reporter, “you know quite
a bit of Chana.”
“Well, they gave us a glossary after we boarded
the Andromeda, and I haven’t had much else to do, so
I’ve been studying.”
“That’s great. You’ll find it will come in handy.
More and more people are using Chana in their daily
conversation.”
“I want to hear the chanabird,” she continued.
“Do you think I can?”
“Yes,” the reporter responded, “they are night
birds, and if you take a walk where it’s dark, I think
you’ll hear them.”
“Oooeee,” she responded. “That’s great. I don’t
think ‘Oooeee’ is Chana.” The reporter laughed. She
laughed, too.
Another reporter approached an elderly woman
with white hair and a black and yellow dress. “What do
you think of Kanatara?”
*
tara … beautiful
ulumi … bright
uh-a-muh-a … spirit
146
First Stroll on Kanatara
“Well, for me,” she began, “this is a dream of a
lifetime. After my husband died, I didn’t know where I
wanted to retire. I’ve always wanted to live in the tropics. My physician husband and I lived in Fiji and then
in Tonga for a few years. I’ve always wanted to go
back.
“And then I heard about Kanatara. I got on the
waiting list just as soon as I could. When I heard that I
could go on the first Andromeda, I just about flew
around the room and out into the yard!”
“Oh, look,” the reporter said, “I think they are
about to begin the ribbon-cutting. Would you please
excuse me?”
“Oh, yes, certainly. I’ll be heading there myself.”
147
Kanatara—The Story
148
2004
17. THE SILENT BULLET
By midnight, the crowd had gathered for the
ribbon-cutting ceremony for the opening of the first
mile of the Silent Bullet, the Monorail bullet train
which would glide almost silently at speeds up to 180
miles (290 km) per hour.
Jepe went to the front of the large crowd and
stood before the podium. The population of the island
stood at 1,350. “On this gorgeous Kanatara night . . .”
The crowd swooned.
“. . . with tropical breezes, and the calling of the
chanabirds, and the sound of the hooligahs,* we celebrate the completed first mile of the Silent Bullet Monorail and the first Monorail car.” The people oohed and
ahhed at the Monorail car, the rails and the partially
completed station.
“Using twenty-first century space-age design
and technology, the Monorail cars are being constructed
of Neutramica, the neutron-hardened ceramic that we
have developed. Powered by hydrogen-e, it will speed
along its path almost silently on an elevated ceramic
rail. There are two rails, of course, because the Monorail will go in both directions. The only sounds the passengers inside will hear is their own conversation. The
*
hooligah (HOO-lee-GAH): an insect native to Kanatara; somewhat similar to a cicada, or the chicharra found in Latin America
149
Kanatara—The Story
2004
ceramic will be transparent for windows and domes and
colored for other components. It will glow in the dark.”
“Oooooeeee,” the crowd gleefully responded.
“Now, I would like to introduce the Chief of
Design of the Silent Bullet. He is the man who coordinated the design efforts of countless people both here
and around the world by Internet. Here he is, DesignBull.” The crowd responded with loud applause.
DesignBull walked to the podium, embraced
Jepe, and began his remarks. “This has truly been a
joint effort. First of all, hydrogen-e had to be invented.
Then Neutramica had to be invented. And during this
time, many of us were working on the design of what
will be the way to move about Kanatara. Bicycles are
fine. I love my bicycle. But if I’m going to go 250 miles
(402 km), I’d rather go by Monorail.”
The crowd gave a resounding cheer.
“The Silent Bullet will be able to reach its top
speed of 180 miles (290 km) per hour in approximately
20 seconds after leaving a station. But for passenger
comfort, its acceleration will not be so dramatic. Were
it not for its governor holding back its speed, it could
reach a speed of 280 miles (451 km) per hour.
“In its undercarriage, each Monorail car will
have the capacity to carry as many bicycles as passengers. So, you put your bicycle on the Monorail, ride to
your destination, take your bicycle out from the undercarriage, and ride away. It’s that simple.
“Special Monorail freight cars are being produced to move items like commercial goods, scientific
equipment, and building equipment and materials. And,
of course, we will have a special Monorail with special
cars to move the large amounts of Neutramica we’ll
150
The Silent Bullet
need to build our central city, what we will call Kanatara City. Special cars on the regular Monorail track will
carry Neutramica to other building sites around the island—wherever residential developments are planned.
Silent Bullet Monorail Car
“Now I’d like to introduce my colleague who is
the head of the group who will lay the rails, the Head of
Project, RailHead.”
RailHead came to the podium and embraced
DesignBull. The audience clapped.
Several young women jumped up and set up
large screens while two young men operated a computer projector, projecting images onto the screens so everyone could see them.
RailHead spoke into the microphone. “I want to
give you an idea of where the Silent Bullet will go on
the island.” He took a laser light and pointed its red
beam to several solid lines on the screen, representing
the various Monorail lines on the map of Kanatara.
“The principal line will be the Port KahaliKanatara City line as shown by this heavy straight line.
From Kanatara City, one Mini-Mono line will run
northeast to Ulumi Lake and another will run northwest
toward the Chana Desert and then up into the Tara
Mountains. This line will make its way up to the
Kamakala Hot Springs and Ski Resort. Another line
will run south from Port Kahali to Kahali Beach. There
will be a freight line running from Neutrakana to Kana-
151
Kanatara—The Story
2004
tara City to provide all the Neutramica that will be
needed to build the city.
“There will be Mini-Monos running throughout
Kanatara City for local transportation. The Mini-Mono
is a scaled down version of the Monorail for use in going to more out of the way places. The rails of the MiniMono will be easier to lay in difficult areas such as up
in the mountains. Because Mini-Monos are smaller,
they will also be more suitable for transportation around
Kanatara City and within the Bogas, the Botanical Gardens that are being planned.
“The first station of the Monorail system will be
in Port Kahali. Other stations will be added as the construction gangs begin to lay rails toward what will be
Kanatara City. All along the Monorail will be bicycle
paths and hiking paths. Every 25 miles (40 km), there
will be a Monorail station where inns and camping areas are planned. Avid bicycle riders and hikers will find
it very easy to take a Monorail or Mini-Mono, get off at
a station, ride or hike 25 miles (40 km) to another station, and then get back on and go somewhere else.
“Hopefully, within a year, we will have the
maiden run of the Silent Bullet. We have a lot of work
to do, but we have many people helping. Our construction gangs are growing as our population grows.
“Let’s give a round of applause to all the men
and women who have designed and are building this
beautiful system.” The crowd stood and applauded.
Jepe took the mike. “Thank you, RailHead. All
of you are now dismissed. Our newcomers can wander
around as long as they want. We have no curfews. Go
back to the ship whenever you want. Breakfast for you
will be served at the usual hour. Since this is your first
152
The Silent Bullet
night on Kanatara, even though the hour is late, we encourage you to spend some time walking around before
heading back to the ship. This is your first night in paradise. Enjoy the calls of the chanabirds, the sounds of
the hooligahs and other sounds of the night. On behalf
of the welcoming committee, we want to say again,
‘Katana Puna Nanah-o! Welcome New People!’” The
crowd cheered.
The revelers continued to enjoy the tropical
night. As the moon was setting, the crowd of newcomers began to disperse. Some returned to the cruise ship
while others continued to wander around oohing and
ahhing at the construction of the giant Grand Kahali
Hotel. The hotel would be the place where all future
residents would spend their first nights in Kanatara.
153
Kanatara—The Story
154
2004
18. FIRST MARRIAGE ON THE ISLAND
At the March equinox celebration, on the beach
at the bay, just before dawn, a barefoot Kanadave went
to the front of the crowd. He took the mike and announced, “At this beautiful time of equinox, you are all
invited to the first marriage on Kanatara. I’m sure we’ll
have lots more! We invite the couple and their entourage to come up to the front.”
While the entourage moved toward the front,
Kanadave continued. “You may remember at the June
solstice last year, Calendrico told us that the next especially favorable time for anyone planning to marry
would be this equinox. He told us that an especially favorable time of the year for the Chana people was when
a new or full moon came at the same time as an equinox
or solstice. Well, that’s the situation we have right now.
We have both an equinox and a new moon. New
moons, of course, are favorable for new beginnings.
Today, we are celebrating the beginning of a new life
together in marriage.”
The crowd cheered for the couple and the especially favorable time.
Latero was about 29 or 30 and Bria was 22 or
23. They were both dressed in white. She had a flowing
white dress, with necklaces of orchids and bougainvil-
155
Kanatara—The Story
2004
lea. He had a white koho* shirt, white pants and a bougainvillea garland around his neck. They each had a
hibiscus blossom behind the right ear, following the
Polynesian custom indicating one is unmarried. They
were both barefoot as was their entourage consisting of
their parents and a few friends.
The couple faced the crowd. Their parents, and
two friends for each of them, faced them. As the sun
just began to peek over the eastern horizon, Latero’s
father and mother in unison asked him, “Do you take
this woman to be your wife till death do you part?” He
answered, “Tah. Ono tolu-ah.”
Then Bria’s parents asked her, “Do you take this
man to be your husband till death do you part?” She
answered, “Tah. Ono tolu-ah.”
Then her parents asked him, “Do you take this
woman to be your wife till death do you part?” He answered, “Tah. Ono tolu-ah.”
Then his parents asked her, “Do you take this
man to be your husband till death do you part?” She
answered, “Tah. Ono tolu-ah.”
Next, two of his friends asked the same question
to him and then to her. Finally, two of her friends asked
the same question to her and to him. Each of those to be
wedded had said ‘Ono tolu-ah’ [I do] four times.
With the questions and answers finished, the
groom took a gold ring from his shirt and put it on the
bride’s finger. They smiled at each other, kissed each
other, embraced, and kissed again. Then, they each took
*
koho … aloha
Tah … Yes
Ono tolu-ah … I do. (I agree.)
156
First Marriage on the Island
the hibiscus blossom of the other and moved it from
behind the right ear to behind the left ear—the Polynesian custom now indicating they were married. With
smiles all around, the reception began.
Thirty musicians began playing indigenous marriage celebration music of two thousand years ago on
their Chana instruments. With sand in their toes, the
newly married couple began dancing and invited the
crowd to dance with them. She invited the women to
dance with him, and he invited the men to dance with
her. Then, all danced together in a circle that grew larger as more joined in.
The food people had made a six-foot high cake
of fresh fruit. There were tables of fresh fruit cakes
throughout the beach area so everyone in the crowd
could have as much as desired. Champagne was plentiful. As the sun rose higher in the sky, people wandered
around until they began to leave one by one.
<><><><><><>
At the June solstice celebration, the population
of 1,350 came together once again under the mangoes
at Butterfly grove, looking out onto Kahali Bay. Musical groups, indigenous, popular, and classical, gave the
celebrating crowd a repertoire of musical delight.
Kanadoug took the mike and asked, “Pana
*
paki? ”
The crowd responded, “Pono kama! Ana paki?”
Kanadoug responded, “Ono kama!”
*
Pana paki? … How are you all?
Pono kama! Ana paki?… We are good! How are you?
Ono kama! … I am good! (I am fine!)
157
Kanatara—The Story
2004
Then he announced that a wing of the Grand
Kahali Hotel had been completed. “The newcomers
who arrived on the first Andromeda cruise ship were
comfortably ensconced at the Grand Kahali a short time
after their arrival in January. But future newcomers will
be able to disembark from the Andromeda and go immediately to the Grand Kahali.”
Kanadave took the mike. “A couple of months
ago, the Silent Bullet Monorail reached 125 miles down
the Kana Coast to Kahali Beach. It was a long and arduous task, working with the new material Neutramica.
But we’re there!
“Could we give three cheers for the Monorail
construction gang?”
Some of the audience shouted, “Hip, hip, hooray! Hip, hip, hooray! Hip, hip, hooray!” Others who
knew some Chana shouted, “Kalilani!* Kalilani!
Kalilani!”
“Thank you my friends. It will be easier from
here on because of the experience that the Monorail
gang gained in going down to Kahali Beach. But it
wasn’t easy.”
“Kalilani!” the crowd cried out again and gave
another round of applause.
Kanadave continued, “For those residents who
may want to spread your wings from the Grand Kahali
Hotel, spacious as it is, you can now speed to Kahali
Beach on the Silent Bullet at speeds of up to 180 miles
(290 km) per hour.”
*
Kalilani! … Hurrah!
158
First Marriage on the Island
“Tah! Tah! Tara!* Tara! Lani! Lani!” They
filled the air with their voices.
“Inns and restaurants are planned for Kahali
Beach. Later there will be many condos. White sand
Kahali Beach is incredibly beautiful. Many people may
want to live there. Those in the Grand Kahali can go for
a day excursion. Take your own food, or spend the
night camping. When you have your fill of sand and
surf, take the Silent Bullet back.
“About a month ago, a second construction gang
finished laying about 125 miles (201 km) of Neutramica rails on the way to Kanatara City. That’s about halfway! A third construction gang finished laying rails
about half-way from Neutrakana to Kanatara City.”
“Tah! Tah! Tara! Tara! Lani! Lani!” The crowd
cheered again.
One of the construction gang went to the podium. Kanadave gave him a big embrace. “We gained
experience when we laid the rails to Kahali Beach. It’s
easier going now. Boy, you all look really beautiful out
there!”
“Tah! Tah!”
Kanadoug took the mike. “Here’s the picture.
We need both lines completed before we can start
building Kanatara City. We need the Port KahaliKanatara City line to be finished so the construction
workers can be moved up there each day to work. They
are mostly here in Port Kahali now. Then, we need the
Neutrakana-Kanatara City line to be finished so the
tremendous amounts of Neutramica can be moved to
*
Tara! … Beautiful
Lani! … Awesome!
159
Kanatara—The Story
2004
Kanatara City to build streets, buildings, Mini-Mono
rails and so on. The Monorail cars themselves are built
here in Port Kahali. So we need both lines completed
before we can start building Kanatara City.”
Ipanema’s blimp flew low over the crowd
throwing out orchid and hibiscus blossoms.
<><><><><><>
At the December solstice celebration, after a
night of singing, dancing, and swimming in the bay, the
people met in the morning at Butterfly Grove. There
was indigenous music and the usual announcements.
Ipanema’s blimp added to the flavor of the celebration.
A few fruit stands had been set up around the
crowd, giving away half coconut shells filled with
sliced pineapple, sliced mango, and papayas. Others
offered half coconut shells filled with kava.
Jepe took the mike. “Pana paki?”
The crowd answered “Pono kama! Ana paki?”
Jepe responded, tossing a pineapple into the air,
“Ono kama!
“As you know, we needed both lines—the Port
Kahali-Kanatara City line and the Neutrakana-Kanatara
City Monorail lines to be completed before we could
begin building Kanatara City. Well, I would like to announce that just before the solstice, they both were
completed!”
The crowd went wild, throwing flowers in the
air. A woman with a large kite on a string ran around
160
First Marriage on the Island
and through the crowd shouting, “Pono nanah-o
Chana!*”
People began dancing and hugging each other.
They picked up the rhythm and started chanting, “Pono
nanah-o Chana!”
Jepe continued, “We are now 1,350 happy and
peaceful people. Another Andromeda ship will arrive
shortly—in January. This will add another 540 people,
many of whom will build Kanatara City and the Monorail lines. Our Andromeda cruise ship could have
brought another group during the past year, but we
weren’t quite ready for them.”
Ipanema’s blimp flew low. She had painted
words on the side in bright letters: “Pono nanah-o
Chana!”
Then, to everyone’s surprise, a large flying balloon with a gondola basket underneath began to pass
over the crowd. There were several people in the basket. Letters on the side of the balloon said, “Pono haga,* Pono hagah-o.”
Jepe had a big smile and said, “Okay, we know
some of you have been putting this together in your
spare time. Hydrogen is good for a lot of things. First, it
was a blimp. Now it is a balloon with a gondola. I knew
at some point it was a question of imagination, not just
technology.”
The crowd laughed and waved at the occupants
in the basket. Those in the basket threw down orchids
and gardenias to the crowd. The crowd returned the fa-
*
*
Pono nanah-o Chana! … We are the Chana people!
Pono haga … Our purpose
Pono hagah-o … Our destiny
161
Kanatara—The Story
2004
vor by throwing kisses toward the flying balloon and its
gondola.
Jepe continued, “Now, don’t forget we’re having the Silent Bullet’s Maiden Run to Kanatara City on
January 1. We’ll have room for everybody on the Monorail, so don’t miss it.” The crowd cried with enthusiastic approbation.
Kanadoug dismissed the crowd to continue celebrating the solstice and the island. “Chalah!* Have a
Chana day!”
The crowd returned, “Chalah!”
They headed to the beach for volleyball games,
beach croquet, and kite surfing. Some napped under the
coconut palms to the sweet Kanatara breezes of another
year nearly over.
*
Chalah! … Good-bye!
162
2005
19. MAIDEN RUN TO KANATARA CITY
It was January 1, just one year after the Andromeda brought Kanatara its first group of people who
didn’t have to brave the Barrier Storms. The Port Kahali-Kanatara City Monorail line had been finished just
before the previous December solstice. A year ago, the
island had oohed and ahhed at the Monorail sitting in its
station, glowing in the dark. Now, all 1,350 of Kanatara’s inhabitants were about to take the Monorail to
Kanatara City, 250 miles (402 km) to the east. It was an
event to be celebrated.
The Maiden Run would take place at noon. The
people gathered beforehand to ooh and ahh again at the
glorious lakih-o chapo, the ‘land boat’ that could cruise
over land at 185 miles (298 km) per hour. At the Port
Kahali station, big letters spelled out ‘Lakih-o Chapo.’
Jepe went to the front of the crowd and spoke
into a microphone. “Pana paki?*”
“Pono kama! Ana paki?” the crowd answered
back.
“Ono kama!” Jepe responded. “I want to tell
you a little about our lakih-o chapo―our Monorail.
*
Pana paki? … How are you all?
Pono kama! Ana paki? … We are good! (We are fine!) How are you?
Ono kama! … I am good! (I am fine!)
163
Kanatara—The Story
2005
“The Monorail and its rails have been well tested so all will go smoothly. There are sufficient Monorail cars so that all 1,350 residents can ride in the train
to what are just the beginnings of Kanatara City. There
will be about twenty cars. Rather than having a separate
engine to pull the train, each car is independently powered by hydrogen-e. Each car has a pilot who is responsible for the movement of the car. All the cars will be
hooked together for the ride, but any cars can disconnect from the train if they wish. Hydrogen-e is the fuel
for the turbines that drive each Monorail car.
“Each car has a refrigeration and heating system
as well as a small kitchen and wet bar. The champagne
for the trip will be cold and comes from vineyard
grapes from the island. Of course, there are restrooms
and other amenities. You are free to enter the Monorail
train any time you wish.”
A construction worker with bulging muscles,
who went by the persona BuildEm, got on the train and
exclaimed, “Now supposedly, the only thing we can
hear at 185 miles (298 km) per hour is our conversation. That will be something to behold!”
A young girl with pretty pigtails and a big smile,
whose persona was PigTail, giggled and said, “I just
want to see it glow in the dark.”
“Yes, we’ll be seeing that this evening,” someone suggested.
An elderly lady with binoculars in her hands
entered the train and said, “My persona is LadyGo, and
I’ve never gone 185 (298 km) except on a plane.” Putting her binoculars aside, she took a glass of cold
champagne from the tray offered by one of the food
people.
164
Maiden Run to Kanatara City
A Kanatara Morning Post reporter was covering
the event. He asked one fellow in his thirties, “What do
you think of all this?”
He responded, “My persona is BrownMan and,
well, I think it’s absolutely amazing that we can have
this kind of technology on our island in the South Pacific. Truly amazing.”
“Neutramica, hydrogen-e, the Monorail, cruise
ships, what will be next?” asked the man sitting next to
him, who called himself Helper20.
“Well, I have heard rumors,” said a dapper
woman in front of them, who went by the persona of
Tygoom, “that there is more to come. I don’t know if
there’s any truth to the rumors, but I’ve heard that they
are working on some kind of flying saucer to get around
the island.”
“No!” exclaimed the man in front of her, persona PrestoMan, with great surprise and disbelief.
The Morning Post reporter, Reporteroo, now
took notice. “Do you think such a thing would be possible?” he queried no one in particular.
A young woman in her twenties with yellow
ribbons in her hair, persona Twinkle, responded, “Of
course that’s possible! Why shouldn’t it be? If we can
make a Monorail and a cruise ship, why shouldn’t we
be able to make a flying saucer? Anyway, I heard it is
going to be called an air saucer, not a flying saucer. I
mean, it’s not like it’s from outer space or something.”
A young man in his early thirties who called
himself RedMan responded, “I’ve been working in the
hydrogen-e area. I’m not a scientist, but I’m working
there. The way they talk, nothing is impossible here.
We’re in some kind of other dimension or something. I
165
Kanatara—The Story
2005
don’t know how it works, but I know I never felt like
this before I came here. I feel like I wasn’t awake before. Now I’m coming awake to my life.”
“Yeah, that’s what I think, too,” said Twinkle in
response. “I could never really see myself until I came
here. Now, I’m beginning to understand life and what
my purpose is. I’m getting an idea of what my destiny
is. I think humankind can do a lot more than it thinks it
can. It just needs to get out of the ego thing and work
together.”
“Oh, look everybody has gotten aboard now,”
said PigTail in an excited voice, looking out the window. “I think we’re about ready to take off.”
An announcement over the speaker system
reached all the cars. “Please take your seat, dear brothers and sisters. The acceleration on this train can be rather strong, and we don’t want to have to pick any of
you up off the floor.” Everybody laughed.
“We’ll be stopping occasionally on the way to
Kanatara City. There are stations every 25 miles (40
km), but we’ll stop only at two or three. You will notice
there are phones in the armrests. You cannot see your
pilot. He is in a special cabin, but you can always talk
to him via your phone. If you have any concerns, you
can also call the porter by pushing a button on the same
phone. Every car has a porter to help you with any
needs you may have.
“At one of our stops this afternoon, there will be
a wide variety of food and drink available at the station.
When we reach Kanatara City, you will have a chance
to walk around and see the beginnings of what will be
our central city. Then along toward dusk, we will have
a five-course dinner.
166
Maiden Run to Kanatara City
“All of this, of course, is thanks to our tremendous food people under the wise direction of FoodHead. The dinner meal will be served on a rise in Kanatara City so you will be able to eat and drink while seeing the sun go down. Then on the way back, our children will enjoy seeing how our Monorail glows in the
dark. We’ll stop at a station or two, so you can step outside, walk some distance from the train, and see the
glow. I believe there are about eight neon-type colors
that have been chosen for today’s ride.
“These cars have been tested for safety to the
level that it is virtually impossible to be injured in a
crash—other than if you are standing. In that case, you
could fall down. But if you are sitting, you are very
well protected by the design of the soft seats, including
the seat in front of you.
“Also, because of the way the cars ride on the
rails, it is virtually impossible to have a crash. There are
two rails, one going in each direction. The way the cars
are designed, they have a built-in radar system that will
stop the car if there is another car stopped on your
track. If the other car is coming toward your car, your
car will go in reverse to avoid a crash. The other car, of
course, has the same radar system. In the quite unlikely
event that the hydrogen-e turbine engine on the car
should stop running, another car can easily lock onto it
and push it or pull it home.
“We will begin regularly scheduled departures
from Port Kahali and Kanatara City starting tomorrow.
Food and drink will always be available at station stops.
At the Port Kahali and Kanatara City stations, full restaurant service will be provided. By all of us kanalo
muhama, working together, in makoh-a, harmony, we
167
Kanatara—The Story
2005
all have what we need. Fulfill ana haga, your purpose,
in life, and achieve ana hagah-o, your destiny. Thank
you for your attention.”
All the occupants took their seats, and the train
began to move slowly forward. Then the acceleration
increased until all were pushed back in their seats. It
was exhilarating, and the large windows gave everyone
spectacular views. LadyGo shared her binoculars with
those around her. Everything went as promised.
When they all got back to Port Kahali, Reporteroo wanted to get a line or two for the Morning Post’s
next edition. He asked a man in a wheelchair who went
by the persona of WheelerDealer what he thought of
the lakih-o chapo, the Monorail. “Well, I think we have
a terrific system of transportation for the island. Since I
can’t very well hike or bicycle, it will be a great way
for me to get up to the hot springs or down to Kahali
Beach or over to Ulumi Lake or out to the Chana Desert. For me, it’s truly wonderful.”
A woman next to him offered her opinion. “My
persona is LadyDancer, and I feel very grateful to all
those who have worked so hard to make this dream a
reality. It makes me want to work harder at the job I do
and take even more seriously my purpose in life.”
Around March, Kanadave, Kanadoug, Jepe,
their wives, and the children took three LaWhATs for a
trek to the Tara Mountains. They felt they needed a
break after four years of almost constant activity developing the island.
<><><><><><>
168
Maiden Run to Kanatara City
At the June solstice, FoodHead and BuildEm led
the celebration. FoodHead took the microphone and
announced, “Koho, nanah-o kama!*”
The crowd answered back, “Koho, huni kama!”
The people were getting more comfortable with speaking Chana.
“Pana paki?” FoodHead asked.
“Kama! Kama!” was the loud and enthusiastic
response. “Pono kama!”
“There are now over 1,600 tara ah ulumi, that
is, beautiful and bright, people here on the island. The
makoh-a, the harmony, is wonderful.”
The people shouted back, “Tara! Ulumi! Tah!”
“Kanadave, Kanadoug, Jepe, and their families
have taken LaWhATs and have left Port Kahali. They
are trekking to the Tara Mountains and, you know, getting away from it all. They have been in the middle of
incredible development for four solid years, with
scarcely a break. We wish them well on their adventure
inland!” He smiled as he went on, “They didn’t take
any communication capability with them, so we won’t
be able to contact them until they get back.”
“Tah! Tah!” the crowd responded.
“With the increasing number of LaWhATs being produced, Kanatara is getting to be more and more
explored and more mapped out. It has finally been de-
*
Koho, nanah-o kama! … Hello, good people!
Koho, huni kama! … Hello, good man!
Kama! … Good! (Fine!)
Pono kama! … We are good! (We are fine!)
Tara! … Beautiful!
Ulumi! … Bright!
Tah! … Yes!
169
Kanatara—The Story
2005
termined that HaKatana, the highest peak in the Tara
Mountains, is about 18,900 feet (5761 m) high.”
The crowd rose to applaud. “Pono nanah-o
Chana!* Pono nanah-o Chana!”
Large screens were placed up in front of the
crowd. “Take a look at this slide.” The slide was projected onto the screens. “We have mapped the temperatures around the island.”
High
Low
Weather Report for Kanatara — Temperatures in Fahrenheit
Port
Kanatara
Kamakala
Chana
Kanatara
Kahali
City
Hot
Desert
Plains
Springs
92
88
28
110
84
(33)
(31)
(-2)
(43)
(29)
85
75
-3
63
71
(29)
(24)
(-19)
(17)
(22)
(Celsius)
Ulumi
Cloud
Lake
Forests
80
(27)
65
(18)
61
(16)
49
(9)
“These temperatures will pretty much be the
same throughout the year.”
BuildEm took the microphone. “Koho, nanah-o
kama!”
The crowd answered back, “Koho, huni kama!”
“Pana paki?” BuildEm asked.
“Kama! Kama!” was the loud and enthusiastic
response. “Pono kama!”
“I want to announce to you nanah-o kama, good
people, that the construction of Port Kahali is now finished. Work on the Grand Kahali is continuing with
more wings being opened up for increasing numbers of
newcomers to stay. In Kanatara City, the construction
gang is building the main roads in what will be the central city. They are also constructing the Mini-Mono
rails around what will be the Bogas, the Botanical Gardens.”
*
Pono nanah-o Chana! … We are the Chana People!
170
Maiden Run to Kanatara City
“Tah! Tah! Kama! Kama!”
“I would also like to announce that the construction gang is pushing the Mini-Mono northwest from
Kanatara City toward the Chana Desert, passing the
cutoff to the Kanatana archaeological ruins, and skirting
the Chana Desert. It will then head northwest up
through the Tara Mountains to Kamakala Hot Springs
where a future ski resort is planned. You residents requested that we push ahead on this project even though
taking the Mini-Mono to Ulumi Lake was the earlier
plan. It seems we have a lot of people that want to ski.”
“Tah! Tah! Kama! Kama!”
“The Mini-Mono is smaller than the Silent Bullet and the rails are easier to lay, so construction will go
more quickly until reaching the Tara Mountains. Then
the difficulties will mount. Even with advanced technology, it will not be a simple task to go up through the
mountains.”
FoodHead took the mike again. “You may already know that the Andromeda bringing our last group
of newcomers to the island on January 1 felt the Indian
Ocean tsunami.”
“Lani!* Lani!” The crowd was excited.
“The Andromeda went way up and then back
down again as the tsunami passed. The epicenter was
off the west coast of Sumatra, Indonesia. Sri Lanka, Indonesia, India, and Thailand were the hardest hit. With
a magnitude of 9.1 to 9.3, it was the second largest
earthquake ever to be recorded by seismograph. It
caused the entire planet to vibrate as much as .4 inches
(1 cm).
*
Lani! … Awesome!!
171
Kanatara—The Story
2005
The big tsunami did not adversely affect Kanatara, although waves bigger than usual were reported at
Kahali Beach and Neutrakana Bay. Of course, some of
you near Kahali Bay saw a big wave come in. Thankfully, it didn’t do severe damage to the new pier.
“Oh, and one more thing. The food production
people, who are totally, totally lani, awesome, have designed and built the following places to enjoy food and
beverage at the Grand Kahali Hotel:
Coconut Palms Restaurant
Port Kahali Kava Bar
Blue Pacific Grill
Totally Juiced (juice and health bar).
“Lani! Lani! Tah! Tah!” the crowd exulted.
“Enjoy your celebration! Be thankful for this
island, and continue to fulfill ana haga, your purpose,
and achieve ana hagah-o, your destiny! Chalah!* Have
a Chana day!”
The crowd responded, “Chalah!”
<><><><><><>
For the December solstice celebration, people
stayed up all night around the many bonfires on the
beach. They imbibed kava and watched the fireflies
light up the darkness. There was music and dancing
throughout the night. The waning gibbous moon came
up late, adding to the splendor of the night.
*
Chalah! … Good-bye!
172
Maiden Run to Kanatara City
The next morning, 1,900 people gathered under
the mangoes in Butterfly Grove. There were more than
two dozen stands around the grove giving away exotic
fruits and beverages as well as mango-pineapple sodas,
papaya-banana salads, and orange-lemon sours. With
small portable hydrogen-e generators, these delectable
treats were offered ice cold, in half coconut shells. At
the same time, other stands offered grilled mahi mahi
with side dishes of brown rice with either cashews and
dates, or pineapple and pecans.
Indigenous, popular, and classical musical
groups played throughout the morning as Ipanema’s
blimp flew overhead. The occupants of a growing number of hydrogen-e balloons with gondolas threw flamingo flowers and gardenias to the crowd below.
FoodHead and BuildEm again led the celebration. “Koho, pana nanah-o kama!*” FoodHead began.
“Koho!” the crowd responded.
“Lani poho-muhama!” FoodHead continued.
“Tah! Lani! Tah! Lani!” the people shouted
back.
BuildEm took the microphone. “Katana to the
6th December solstice celebration on Kanatara! You are
all having a splendid time, and we’re not going to interrupt your celebration for announcements this time.
Kanadave, Kanadoug, Jepe, with their wives, children,
and LaWhATs have not returned. Let us wish them
well, wherever on the island they are!”
“Tah! Tah!” the crowd responded.
*
Koho, pana nanah-o kama! … Hello, you good people!
Koho! … Hello!
Lani poho-muhama! … Awesome festival!
Katana … Welcome
173
Kanatara—The Story
2005
A group of people danced to the front and surrounded FoodHead and BuildEm, sweeping them into
their midst. Drums were beating. Horns were blowing.
Musicians began playing indigenous music.
“Chalah! Chalah!” they shouted as FoodHead
and BuildEm disappeared. “Have a Chana day!”
The crowd laughed and shouted back, “Chalah!
Chalah!”
174
2006
20. 15° SOUTH/115° WEST
As the people gathered in Butterfly Grove for
the June solstice celebration, FoodHead took the microphone. “Koho! Pana paki?*”
The crowd answered, “Pono kama! Ana paki?”
FoodHead responded, “Ono kama. Katana alu
pana! We are here for our twelfth solstice, cha ka ka
shama, celebration. We have lots of announcements.
“First, I want you to know that Kanadave,
Kanadoug, Jepe, their wives, and children have not yet
returned from their trek to the Tara Mountains. Let us
again wish them well.”
“Tah! Tah!” the crowd called out.
“The number of Kanatara residents is now more
than 2,800. In addition to the January newcomer group
of 540, another group of 540 just arrived a couple of
weeks ago. We want to offer a very warm and enthusiastic katana to this group. Let’s give them a special
round of applause.”
*
Koho! Pana paki? … Hello! How are you all?
Pono kama! Ana paki? … We are good! (We are fine!) How are you?
Ono kama. … I am good. (I am fine.)
Katana alu pana! … Welcome to all of you!
Tah! … Yes!
katana … welcome
175
Kanatara—The Story
2006
“Tah! Tah! Katana! Katana!” The people applauded.
“Kamalani* for that. You newcomers are in for
the most wonderful adventure of your life.
“Construction has begun on the Andromeda
1500 which will hold 1,500 passengers and also on a
new 1500 Pilot Ship designed especially for going
through the Barrier Storms. The Andromeda 540 is not
a very fast ship. The huge ballasts and stabilizers slow
the ship down considerably. The Andromeda 1500’s
and 3000’s will have normal-sized ballasts and stabilizers. Thus they will be able to go through the water at
a normal speed. The 1500 and 3000 Pilot Ships will
have gigantic ballasts and huge stabilizers for going the
relatively short distance through the Barrier Storms.
“The Pilot Ship will meet each Andromeda on
the other side of the Barrier Storms and ferry the passengers through to Port Kahali. For the first time, the
trip through the Barrier Storms will truly be comfortable. Passengers will be able to witness some of earth’s
most spectacular storms from the comfort of the Pilot
Ship’s passenger decks.”
BuildEm took the mike. “Work on the Grand
Kahali Hotel continues to expand. The hotel will have
to be extremely large in order to handle the growing
number of newcomers that will be arriving.
“Now that the Mini-Mono has reached up into
the Tara Mountains, work can begin on the Kamakala
Hot Springs and Ski Resort. Geologists can also begin
searching for minerals in the mountains so our island
can one day be self-sufficient. Botanists, biologists, or*
Kamalani … Thank you
176
15° South/115° West
nithologists, and zoologists continue to map the flora
and fauna of the island and the stunningly beautiful
tropical fish that many of you have seen in your snorkeling and scuba diving.
“The entomologists have confirmed there are no
mosquitoes on the island. The zoologists have confirmed that, like Hawaii, Kanatara has no snakes. The
marine biologists tell us that sharks avoid the Barrier
Storms. The Portuguese Man o’ War and jellyfish are
totally dashed to pieces and can’t get through the Barrier Storms. As far as we know, there are no dangerous
fish or marine life around the island. Also, no poisonous insects or plants.
“The production of hydrogen-e fishing boats has
allowed the food production people to ply the waters
around Kanatara for fish. They fish for mahi mahi, ahi,
aku, monchong, ono, and other delicious ocean fish.
That explains the abundance of fish available for all of
you.”
“Tah! Tah!” the crowd agreed.
FoodHead again took the mike. Overhead, three
vivid balloons with gondolas beneath slowly moved
over the crowd, throwing out flowers and colored balloons. Ipanema’s blimp was also flying nearby.
“I should tell you that some scientists and construction people have gotten together in their spare time
and built a mini-factory to produce balloons with gondolas like what you see above us. Hydrogen-e is not
explosive like hydrogen is, and the gondolas have propellers so they can maneuver their way around the island. They can reach places that the LaWhATs have
difficulty reaching. The hydrogen-e that fills the balloons is much lighter than air giving them their lift. At
177
Kanatara—The Story
2006
the same time, the hydrogen-e also runs the engine driving their propellers. It is a perfect mix of technology
and imagination. The production of the balloons means
you can fly around rather easily. When you want to go
up, add hydrogen-e to the balloon. When you want to
come down, let out some hydrogen-e.”
“Tah! Tah!” the crowd roared with exuberance.
Zoom, the theoretical physicist, now came to the
front of the crowd and took the mike. “Koho, ono hunomah.* I have an amazing announcement to bring to you.
Over the years, we have been at a loss to explain why
Kanatara does not appear on any maps. There has been
much talk about another dimension that we may be in,
and the force or presence that seems to be all around us.
Those of you who came in the sailing vessels will remember the feeling that we were being guided by some
force or presence as we went through the Barrier
Storms.
“The deep peace, the inner clarity, the gentle
light, and the ability to see things in a completely different perspective―these have led many to believe that
we must be in a different dimension. But many others
of us have felt that this is rather unlikely. True, there
has been evidence of some force or presence that seems
to understand the intention of those coming here. You
will remember the rumor of those on that sailing vessel
that tried to get here on their own and were lost at sea.
Well, that rumor has been substantiated as truth by the
media back in San Diego.
“At the beginning, there were many of you who
thought that Kanadave and the others would find only
*
Koho, ono huno-mah. … Hello, my friends.
178
15° South/115° West
blue ocean when they got to 15° south of the equator
and 115° west of Greenwich. Some of you here today
were in that group that said, ‘No way will there be anything but ocean blue!’
“We never could understand it, and neither
could the media in San Diego. But now something
amazing has happened. In the last few months, three
separate cruise ships crossed 15° south/115° west and
took pictures of their position and the blue ocean. No
big island anywhere in sight. The San Diego media says
this proves Kanatara cannot be here. They say it proves
that at 15° south/115° west, where Kanatara is, there is
nothing but just blue ocean. Nothing but ocean blue!
Just blue ocean!! Which of course proves that Kanatara
must be in another dimension!”
At this the crowd became uncontrollable. They
burst into dancing and song. They shouted. They chanted, “Pono nanah-o Chana!* Pono nanah-o Chana!
Pono nanah-o Chana!” They chanted, “Kanatara kaponoh! Kanatara kaponoh!” and again “Pono nanah-o
Chana!”
The three balloons with gondolas threw orchids
and anthuriums down to the crowd. One of the balloons
descended to the ground to join the crowd. People
hugged each other. Tears ran down their faces. This announcement verified what they had believed all along.
Another dimension indeed! That also explained the
sense of presence, the peace, the harmony, and why
such bold technological achievements were possible in
such a short time.
*
Pono nanah-o Chana! … We are the Chana People!
Kanatara kaponoh! … Kanatara moves!
179
Kanatara—The Story
2006
Zoom had completely lost his composure and
was somewhere in the crowd. FoodHead broke away
from those hugging him and went to the podium. “I
have a few more announcements.” But it was hopeless.
One of the balloons maneuvered above him and
dumped a basketful of hibiscus flowers upon his head.
This was the end of the assembly. A greater celebration
was just beginning.
“Chalah!* Chalah! Have a Chana day!” FoodHead shouted. But his voice was drowned out. He disappeared into the crowd.
Corinna, Foodhead’s thirteen-year old daughter,
came running up to him, out of breath. “Daddy!” she
yelled hoarsely. “Daddy!” Regaining her breath, she
asked, “Do you think it’s like Alice in Wonderland?*
You know, going through the looking glass and entering another dimension? Do you, Daddy? Huh, do you?”
She was still breathing heavily.
“Well, sweetheart, we don’t know. We really
don’t know. Now, that story about Alice is fiction, but
it does show that the idea of a parallel dimension is
nothing new. Often fiction mirrors reality.”
Later on that evening, under a waning moon,
Zoom and FoodHead got together. They sat drinking
kava while the chanabirds called to each other and the
hooligahs sang. “It’s kind of hard to understand from a
human perspective,” Zoom began. “If you intend to
come to Kanatara, you run into the Barrier Storms and
risk your life. If you don’t intend to come to Kanatara,
*
Chalah! … Good-bye!
In Lewis Carroll's Through the Looking-Glass, and What Alice Found
There (1871), the sequel to Alice in Wonderland, Alice goes into a
parallel universe by going through the looking glass.
180
15° South/115° West
you will find just blue ocean. It depends on your intention.”
FoodHead continued, “And who or what is reading your intention, and who or what gives you Kanatara, or ocean blue?”
“Yes,” Zoom continued, “it seems like there is
some sort of intelligence operating here, but how and
why?”
“Yes,” FoodHead queried, “and who or what?”
Zoom finished the conversation. “Maybe we
should ask the chanabirds and the hooligahs.”
At that, the two men went home to their families.
181
Kanatara—The Story
182
2006
21. BUILDING THE AIR SAUCER
The December solstice celebration was beginning. It was a solstice with a new moon, so it was an
especially favorable time. FoodHead went to the podium and took the mike. “Koho!* Katana! to our December solstice celebration. Pana paki, ono kama hani-mah
ah hana-mah?”
“Pono kama!” the crowd answered back. “Ana
paki?”
“Ono kama! I would like to announce that
Kanadave, Kanadoug, Jepe, and their families have not
yet come back from their trek. By the way, they intentionally took no communication equipment with them.
They really wanted to get away, so we don’t have any
idea where they are. Let us wish them well!”
“Tah! Tah!” the crowd agreed.
“I would like SaucerHead to come forward and
talk to you about something that has been rumored for
some time. The rumors can now be confirmed, and
*
Koho! … Hello!
Katana! … Welcome!
Pana paki, ono kama hani-mah ah hana-mah? … How are you all, my
good brothers and sisters?
Pono kama! … We are good! (We are fine!)
Ana paki? … How are you?
Ono kama! … I am good! (I am fine!)
Tah! … Yes!
183
Kanatara—The Story
2006
SaucerHead will tell you all about it. SaucerHead is the
head of the Anti-Gravity Project.”
SaucerHead took the mike. “Koho! As many of
you may know, right after Kanadave, Kanadoug, and
their families returned from their first trip to the island
back in 2000, there was a conference in Cambridge.
There was a position paper drafted on how this island
should be developed.
“There were a group of physicists interested in
researching anti-gravity vehicles as a way of moving
about the island. But the consensus of the conference
was that this was not a priority in terms of island development. It was agreed that these physicists could work
on the project, but it would not be given priority. The
position paper put this subject in an addendum.
“Well, even though the project didn’t have priority, we worked on this project. In the last five years,
we have had lots of encouragement from Kanadave and
the others that are now trekking into the Tara Mountains. We also had the encouragement of many scientists.
“Well, at the June solstice celebration, we were
going to announce that we had a working prototype of
what we call an air saucer. But that announcement was
never made because the gathering at the June solstice
celebration fell apart before it was finished. That celebration became a greater celebration of being in another
dimension. It became hopelessly uncontrollable, and
there was no hope of making any kind of announcement.”
184
Building the Air Saucer
The crowd laughed and applauded and some
began to chant, “Pono nanah-o Chana!*” People
hugged each other as they remembered.
“Okay,” SaucerHead went on, as balloons with
gondolas and cheering occupants maneuvered over the
crowd, “I hope we can keep it together this time.”
As the crowd settled down and became quiet
again, SaucerHead continued. “Now we can announce
that the air saucer is way past the prototype stage and is
now in operation. The technology is extremely advanced. It uses antigravity to go up in the air and uses
the gravity fields and the curvature of space-time to
maneuver in whatever direction is desired.
“As you know, moving about on Kanatara is
very slow. Now, with LaWhATs and the new balloons,
it is certainly much better than when all movement
around the island was on foot.”
“Tah! Tah!” The crowd agreed.
“But to go to the rainforest by LaWhAT or balloon is not really practical. To go from Port Kahali by
hydrogen-e boat, at best you’re looking at a few days.
This makes the physicians working on tropical medicine over there somewhat isolated. With the air saucer,
that time is cut down to less than an hour.”
“Lani! Lani!” the crowd roared.
“The air saucers that we are now producing out
of Neutramica will hold eight people very comfortably
and can carry sixteen if necessary. We have the capacity to make larger ones in the future. The technology is
the same, so there is virtually no limit to the size the air
*
Pono nanah-o Chana! … We are the Chana people!
Lani! … Awesome!
185
Kanatara—The Story
2006
saucers can be. As our population grows, the size of the
air saucers we produce may grow as well.”
“We have discovered, and I use the term ‘we’
advisedly because all our technological development on
the island seems to be the result of some force or presence around us, some other dimension that we are tapping into. But we have discovered or invented this antigravity technology, and it can be used for space saucers
that could put a satellite in orbit or even a space village.”
The crowd swooned, and shouted “Pono nanaho Chana! Kanatara kaponoh!*”
SaucerHead went on, “This is only a dream at
this time, but we have the Neutramica to build it out of,
and we obviously have the anti-gravity technology.
Such a satellite or space village would be geo-stationary
over the island at some 300 miles up. At any rate, this
other dimension that we seem to be in, may be leading
us in that direction. We don’t know.
“We have already laid plans for the Chana
Spaceport out in the Chana Desert. This is where the air
saucers will be located. We will also have some air saucers located at Port Kahali and Kanatara City. I want to
thank all of you who have encouraged us over these last
five years. We couldn’t have done it without you.”
SaucerHead left the podium as the crowd gave a
standing and sustained ovation.
*
Kanatara kaponoh! … Kanatara moves!
186
2007
22. RETURN FROM THE TREK
In mid-March, Kanadave, Kanadoug, Jepe, and
their families drove into Port Kahali in their three hydrogen-e LaWhATs. They had taken no means of
communication with them, so they were not able to let
anyone know they were returning. The LaWhATs were
covered with the dust, dirt, and mud of their travels, but
were none the worse for wear. One fender was missing.
Word quickly got around that they were back,
and everyone wanted to hear what the adventurers had
to say. They agreed to wait for the upcoming equinox
gathering so that all could hear at once. Their friends
had been gone two full years and would have much to
share. Also, that would give the trekkers a little time to
rest and freshen up from their trek.
At the equinox gathering, Kanadave stood before the crowd with a big smile. Taking a mike, he exclaimed, “Koho!* Pana paki?”
“Katana!” the crowd responded loudly. “Katana! Katana!” They continued, “Ana paki?”
*
Koho! … Hello!
Pana paki? … How are you all?
Katana! … Welcome!
Ana paki? … How are you?
187
Kanatara—The Story
2007
“Pono nama kama!*” Kanadave responded.
“We have missed all of you,” Kanadave began.
“It’s been a very long journey, not only in miles. . . .
Our intention was to trek inland toward the Tara Mountains. But after a few weeks, we knew that we wanted
to explore more of the geography of Kanatara. And before too long, we decided we wanted to explore all of
Kanatara. This was our island, after all, and we didn’t
know it very well. We had no idea that we’d be gone so
long. We hadn’t planned it that way. But we knew that
you could get along just fine without us.
“We had the feeling as we talked among ourselves that huge throngs of people will want to come to
Kanatara. We felt we needed to get away into the island
both to discover the island and also discover how the
development of the island could be along pakaloh-a,
proper principles.”
Kanajulia took a mike. “It was partially a lark,
to just take off and see how the island really was. We
figured the lark probably wouldn’t last too long. But as
we began to experience the island, we also began to experience an island in time. It was like we were going
back in time, before civilization had made its imprint on
all of us.
“With no lights on the island, the sky was amazingly dark. It was like when we first stepped onto the
island almost seven years ago. The stars were fiery
bright, like our first nights in Kanatara.
“We found numerous ruins on the island. We
noted them all down so the archaeologists will be able
to find them. They will want to start many more digs.
*
Pono nama kama! … We are very good! (We are very fine!)
188
Return from the Trek
Passing these Chana ruins, we felt we were walking in
the footsteps of another time. We were stepping into a
primeval world where we could see our world with new
eyes. We could see clearly what the beat of civilization
does to each one of us.
“We had lots and lots of time to think. The presence we all know so well was even more present to us.
We could see ourselves better than ever. We could feel
our purpose in life and destiny clearer than ever before.
We were open to thinking new thoughts. We realized
more than ever what we have here in Kanatara.”
Jepe took a mike. “We knew with the great
numbers of people coming, perhaps hundreds of thousands or even millions, it would be a challenge to keep
the island soft and gentle, to keep it peaceful and harmonious. Would the island have its notable effect on
everyone? Would everyone sense the presence and feel
the gentleness? Would everyone become . . . awakened? How could people be inspired to keep it the way
it is? Everything that would be built in Kanatara would
need to flow—like the Kanakuli River. Everyone would
need to think new thoughts and consider new ways
about how life really should be.
“This would be the challenge. To let people
build and develop Kanatara while keeping the makuh-a,
the peace, and makoh-a, the harmony, that is here. It
would take a degree of maturity that Kanatara would be
asking people to have.”
Jepe continued. “Two years of trekking around
this incredible island. . . . It’s been two years, and we
haven’t seen all of Kanatara. But we’ve seen a lot.
We’ve trekked and trekked and laughed and giggled.
We’ve seen rainbows and sunsets, moonrises and star-
189
Kanatara—The Story
2007
studded skies. We’ve seen many Chana ruins, reminding us of what has gone before us. We’ve gotten to
know each other very well, too. We had no idea we’d
be gone so long.
“Kanatara turns out to be much more beautiful
than we could have imagined. We saw lots of bohay,
the bird you are familiar with that changes its colors
like a chameleon. We also saw the skoya that the Chana
people wrote about, an unusual animal somewhat like a
deer that also changes its colors.
“But we also saw an island untouched by modern civilization. We saw how our planet could be . . . if
things were different. Could it be part of Kanatara’s
purpose for us to experience what this planet could be,
really should be, putting our footprints softly upon the
earth?”
Jepe’s wife Kanashelly took a mike. “We had a
lot of time to think about what Kanatara should do—for
each other and for the planet. Out there under the stars,
where we could freely dream, we understood that Kanatara is a gift to help people be all they really can be . . .
and let our planet be all that it is intended to be.
“We began to realize how easy it is to forget
that the economy of the planet works for far less than
100% of humanity. We sat around the fire at night and
talked about the scourges facing humanity—poverty,
disease, ignorance, war—and what Kanatara could do
to be a part in helping build answers. Could we not
work toward a day when all people can truly look into
each other’s eyes and say, ‘Ana hani ono, Ana hana
ono, You are my brother, You are my sister’?
“Then we’d put another log on the fire and talk
about connecting the treasure that people have—their
190
Return from the Trek
talents, dreams, knowledge, intelligence, aspirations,
expertise, genius, life experience, resources. . . . If we
could connect these all together, the resulting synergism
would have almost infinite possibilities. What if people
could monetize their assets that lie idle—increase their
economic potential—merging their internal assets with
the wisdom, imagination, creativity, energy, and innovative thinking of other people?
“What if other people could see those treasure
assets and a way to utilize them for mutual benefit?
What if we could construct some kind of transparent
vehicle so everyone could mine their treasures? What if
we could actually create wealth where there was none
before?”
The crowd rose to applaud. “Tah!* Tah! Pono
nanah-o Chana!”
Kanashelly put the mike softly into Kanamarion’s hand. Kanamarion spoke. “Now, we slowly
worked out these thoughts over a period of more than
two years. We understood that the horizons are limitless. We would need a relatively simple system for
connecting people together while at the same time
keeping Kanatara ecologically brilliant. For what good
would it do to maximize everyone’s treasures they have
hidden inside if at the same time we didn’t keep Kanatara as pure and pristine as it is? As we began to say,
‘Walk softly upon the earth.’”
Kanashelly asked for the mike again and took it
gently from Kanamarion’s hand. “Of course, we were
more than a little excited about putting these ideas to
*
Tah! … Yes!
Pono nanah-o Chana! … We are the Chana people!
191
Kanatara—The Story
2007
work, building the infrastructure on this island for the
hundreds of thousands, even millions of people, who
will come here from all over the globe.
“So, walking along in the fresh breezes of this
incredible island, our minds were open. We were ready
to think new thoughts, putting old thoughts aside. We
were deep into that other dimension, that dimension
you all know so well. . . .”
“Tah! Tah!” the crowd cheered.
“As I was saying,” Kanashelly went on, “we
were deep into that other dimension . . . when the incredible happened.”
All six trekkers, standing in front of the crowd,
suddenly had huge smiles on their faces. A man with
six large red balloons came forward and gave one to
each of them. A balloon overhead with its gondola maneuvered over them and dropped a deluge of bougainvillea blossoms. The people shouted, “What happened?
Kumi-umi* tell us!” The six trekkers continued smiling
broadly.
The crowd cheered again, “Tah! Tah! Pono
nanah-o Chana! Kumi-umi! Kumi-umi! Tell us what
happened!”
*
Kumi-umi … Please
192
23. CONTACT FROM ANOTHER STAR SYSTEM
“True joy and true success is falling in love with your
purpose in life once you discover what it is. Make your
dreams the fixed star on which you chart your course.
Where are you steering your ship? Think about the significance of your purpose on planet earth.
“Well,” Kanadave began. “It was getting on toward evening just a little over two weeks ago. It has
taken us that long to get back. We came back immediately to tell you. And we’ve taken a few days now, resting up and cleaning up!”
The crowd cried out again, “Tah!* Tah! Kumiumi, kumi-umi. Please tell us what happened!”
Kanamarion eagerly wanted a mike, and Kanadave gladly gave his over to her. “We had finished dinner and were on a rise where we could see the full
moon just beginning to come up. We were talking . . .
and a luminous saucer-like craft silently set down a
short ways away from us.”
*
Tah! … Yes!
Kumi-umi … Please
193
Kanatara—The Story
2007
“Lani!* Lani! Lani!” the people shouted, “Pono
nanah-o Chana! Kanatara kaponoh! Kanatara kaponoh!”
After the crowd had settled down, Kanamarion
continued. “Eight advanced beings whom we could see
only fuzzily came out of the craft and walked toward
us. We were intrigued and not at all afraid.”
The people could not contain themselves. They
jumped, they yelled, they hugged. Tears ran down their
faces. They laughed, they danced, they began to chant,
“Pono nanah-o Chana!” Then, just as they were settling down again, another group began to chant, “Kanatara kaponoh! Kanatara kaponoh!”
Kanamarion was laughing so hard, she could not
continue. She gave the microphone to Kanajulia who
tried to compose herself and continue. “Chills go up my
spine when I tell you this, but the best is yet to come!”
“Kumi-umi! Kumi-umi! Please tell us!” the people pleaded.
“At first, we wondered how it was that we deserved this visit,” Kanajulia continued. “Were we truly
in another dimension? Were we living by pakaloh-a,
proper principles, in makoh-a, harmony, with each other and with nature around us? Was it the deep, tangible
makuh-a, the peace, on the island that communicated to
these beings that we would be open to why it was that
they had landed in our presence?”
“While we were wondering this,” Kanadave
took the mike, “one of the blurry beings said to us in
perfect English, ‘Yes, that is the reason.’
*
Lani! … Awesome!
Pono nanah-o Chana! … We are the Chana People!
Kanatara kaponoh! … Kanatara moves!
194
Contact from Another Star System
“Of course our first thought was, how could he
know what we were thinking? Again, the being spoke,
‘We can read all your thoughts.’
“Then the other beings surrounded us, but we
were not in the least afraid. The tallest one of them said,
‘My name is Koteri. We are from your nearest star system, Alpha Centauri, and we have come to help you.’
“‘You are in a predicament on this planet,’ the
blurry figure continued. It was difficult to know which
one was talking because their forms were evanescent,
and the boundaries to their outline were blurred. When
they moved, we could see their outlines more clearly.
When they were motionless, we couldn’t really see
them, or we could just barely see them. It was like we
could see through them.
“I motioned for all of us to sit comfortably on
some nearby rocks. The blurry beings obliged. The
moon continued to rise. Koteri arose and spoke.
“‘Your planet is in a predicament. We are
peaceful and have been watching you for a long time—
ever since the Chana people departed 2,000 years ago.
But just as your Einstein fellow discovered over a hundred years ago, time is a funny thing. Space is curved,
and so is time. To you, it seems a long time between the
Chana people’s migration and today. But once you have
reached an advanced stage of being as we have, you can
manipulate time in the same way that you earthlings
know how to manipulate space and matter. The spacetime contiguum, to spin a phrase, is something that allows us to follow you over time without getting the
least bit impatient as your centuries go by.’
“Kanajulia made up some herb tea and squeezed
some fresh oranges. She poured orange juice into five
195
Kanatara—The Story
2007
glasses for the children and offered it to our guests.
They declined. She offered the herb tea to our guests as
well. Again, they declined. She poured the tea into six
cups and passed it around to all of us. We were extremely relaxed and felt like we were with old friends.
The children were especially awed by all this.” Kanadave started laughing. It was difficult for him to stop
laughing, but he continued on.
“‘First of all,’ Koteri went on, taking his time to
be sure that he had our full attention, ‘this predicament
is normal. Humankind is nearing a crossover stage, a
tipping point, when it will leave its chrysalis and enter
the next stage of its evolutionary development. Every
planet that has conscious beings goes through this
stage. It is a necessary stage. It has to do with free will
and how evolution works. Let me explain.
“‘The Designer has programmed into life a design whereby we move from water molecules and
chemicals to amoebas . . . I am speaking poetically . . .
and then from amoebas to coyotes, and then . . . still
speaking poetically . . . from coyotes to humans. We
don’t have any idea how this is done. It is just the way
it is all designed.
“‘The amoeba is a very complex cell, with a
hundred times as many base pairs in its genome as the
human genome,* but it has no brain. From amoebas . . .
still speaking in a poetic manner . . . we move to the
coyote. The coyote has something new—a brain. Finally, we move from coyotes to humankind, which also
*
The human genome contains about 3 billion chemical units of DNA, or
base pairs.
196
Contact from Another Star System
has something new—a mind with a conscience and free
will, and something else I’ll get to in a moment.
“‘At the amoeba stage, it is survival of the fittest. Some amoebas make it and some don’t. If there
isn’t enough food, some amoebas go without and die. It
is the same for the coyote stage. Survival of the fittest.
The coyote must kill the bunny to survive. When it kills
a bunny, it has no twangs of guilt. It is just in its nature
to kill the bunny. The coyote is totally self-interested.
The coyote does not have a conscience or free will—its
operating system is an instinctual one.
“‘In time the coyote brain evolves into the human mind, speaking poetically again. Here, too, we
have no idea how this is done. It is just the way things
are designed. It would appear that the mind is not physical, even though it does not appear in the evolutionary
process until the physical brain is developed. But the
mind is an advancement far beyond brain.
“‘At this point, humankind still has its coyote
nature, the self-interested ‘survival of the fittest’ and
‘dog eat dog’ way of life. But you now have a conscience and free will. The coyote part of you has no
concept of mercy, but the advanced being part of you
develops feelings of mercy and compassion. You have
free will, but programmed instincts like survival of the
fittest are still a part of your operating system.
“‘In the great design of things, as you move toward advanced being, you must replace the programmed instinctual guidance system of the coyote
with another navigational guidance system. The mind
comes equipped with a conscience, which is the ethical
compass the advanced being must have. Without the
conscience, without this compass, there would be no
197
Kanatara—The Story
2007
way to know whether you are on a true course or not.
The coyote is always on a true course because it operates with an instinctual program. The true course for
advanced beings is holding to the ethical design of the
universe.
“‘Mind without conscience would be confused
and confusing. Without a code of what is right, there
would be no way to chart your path through life. It is up
to you to develop an understanding of that code. You
do not make up your own moral code, nor do you look
to any institution or external authority for that. As an
independent being in the universe, you must develop
and perfect your own guidance system to be in tune
with the navigational system of the universe.
“‘Look at it this way. The conscience has instilled within it an ethical compass with values such as
honesty, innocence, humility, virtue, gentleness, and so
on. The universe also has these same values underpinning it as an inherent part of its existence. So what is
required is that the compass of the conscience be lined
up with the values of the universe. It’s that simple.
Your magnetic North Pole can be compared with the
inherent values of the universe, and your conscience
can be compared with a compass. Just as a compass always points to the magnetic North Pole, your conscience will almost always point to the values inherent
in the universe. But just as your compass can be distorted if you hold a magnet near it, your ethical compass,
your conscience, can also be distorted by external negative influences.
“‘In order not to have this distortion, you must
hold tight to pakaloh-a, proper principles, and kachapoh-a, correct action. Cultivate kanamana, wisdom,
198
Contact from Another Star System
and kalamuna, inner independence. Be generous, kind,
and forgiving in thought and action. Understand the
importance of your own good character. Understand the
value of innocence—that is where true joy begins. If
your course is true and straight, the Designer, the Chana
people’s Great Spirit, will assist you—will help you in
your life.
“‘In addition to a conscience, the mind also
comes equipped with free will. We don’t know how it
is that a being moves from instinctual programming to
free will. This did not happen overnight, but evolved
slowly over time. Humankind itself never was aware of
the change taking place. Free will is the most wonderful
chana the Designer has programmed into the universe.
You are free to choose how to fulfill your purpose in
life and how to go about achieving your destiny. You
are no longer programmed! You are free! Only free beings will be found traveling throughout the galaxies.
“‘But free will also carries with it a very grave
danger. A free will with a coyote nature means you can
choose to be a coyote. A coyote who is no longer programmed to eat bunnies but is free to eat everything in
its path is a hazard. If you look around your world, dear
friends, you will see this is what is happening. On planet earth, we have an advanced being with a mind and
free will—acting out its past coyote nature. Even
though he has free will, he is not yet free from his programmed instincts. This is the stage where humankind
is at present—part coyote nature with instinctual programming and part advanced being with free will.’”
199
Kanatara—The Story
200
2007
24. COYOTE TO BUTTERFLY
“‘Your conscience is of great value to you at
this stage. This is the crossover stage when you leave
the chrysalis, the coyote stage, and become the butterfly, the advanced being, with all the glory that implies.
In this transition period, with vast amounts of information being exchanged by the various peoples and cultures of the world—all with different values—it can
become confusing. Only if your conscience is lined up
with the inherent values of the universe can you have
the balance and equanimity you need to move forward
in the evolutionary process.
“‘I have told you how, as the brain evolves into
mind, you began to develop conscience and free will.
But there is a third quantum which comes along with
the newly developing mind. That is the two-way channel of communication which the Designer, the Chana
people’s Great Spirit, establishes with every mind, with
every person. The mind is in contact with the spiritual
dimension through this beam. Now, you have assistance
as you move from coyote to advanced being. You are
not alone.
“‘Just as it is inevitable that the amoeba eventually develops into a being with a brain, so it is inevitable that you will advance into a higher being and leave
your coyote nature behind. It is inevitable that the butterfly will come out of its chrysalis. It is just as inevitable that you will leave your chrysalis behind. You can
201
Kanatara—The Story
2007
see this inevitability in the myriad butterflies in Butterfly Grove. Every one of them was once inside a chrysalis. It is a part of beautiful Design. Now, you understand where you are on the evolutionary scale. We may
speak of moving from coyote to advanced being, but
poetically speaking, it’s coyote to butterfly.
“‘But if the transition is inevitable, you may ask,
why have we come from Alpha Centauri to help you?
The answer is this. Even though the change is inevitable, the crossover can be a long and difficult struggle
with shocking events throughout the planet. Or it can be
a return to innocence and purity and a wonderful voyage into the new dawn. We are here to help you launch
yourselves into your golden future.
“‘Please understand that this is a natural process
for every planet where life begins with molecules of
water. You are not unique. There have been beings on
innumerable planets that have gone through this process
and advanced to the next stage of their development.
Once you understand how the Design works and what
is required, you will be able to prepare to move into the
dawn of the coming era and help others do the same.
“‘Here is the way it works. When it is time to
move from coyote to advanced being, coyote to butterfly, the Designer foresees and allows into the planet a
number of planet puzzles, or huminumi punupunu-mah
in Chana.’ He stopped. ‘Oh, does it surprise you that we
know Chana?’ He continued on. ‘These conundra must
be solved by all the beings there, working together in
harmony. Coyotes are loners. They are jealous of territory and jealous of other coyotes who might eat the
bunnies. Advanced beings work together for the good
of all. So the Design provides for a series of these puz-
202
Coyote to Butterfly
zles that cannot be solved by a few people working to
solve them—or even a great many people. These conundra require that everyone on planet earth work together. Once these planet puzzles are solved, then the
quarantine is lifted. More about the quarantine in a
moment.
“‘The four very difficult planet puzzles to be
solved on planet earth are the following: war, poverty,
disease, and ignorance, in no particular order. At the
same time that these conundra arise on the planet, the
Designer distributes among the population of the planet
what you know as chanas—all the chanas needed to
solve the problems—things such as dreams, talents, imagination, genius, resources, experience, aspirations,
proficiency, knowledge, wisdom, skills, vision, adventures, moxie, intelligence, energy, creativity, information, personality, opportunities, potentialities, excitement, intuition, leadership, passion, capabilities, understanding, insight, interests, abilities, brilliance, ideas,
and explorations. Everyone on the planet has a number
of chanas to combine with the chanas of other people
to solve various parts of the conundra. Each member of
humankind must utilize his or her chanas so the puzzles
can be solved.
“‘It is somewhat like your jigsaw puzzles. In a
jigsaw puzzle, the picture is incomplete if there are
pieces missing. Every piece is essential. The same is
true with every individual on planet earth. Every person
has an individual destiny, which is designed to fit into
the overall puzzle. No one else’s piece will fit where
yours belongs.
“‘You might ask, how could a few missing
pieces, a few missing chanas, make any difference? But
203
Kanatara—The Story
2007
when you look at a jigsaw puzzle and there are pieces
missing, it is obvious that the puzzle is incomplete. In
fact, that may even be the only thing you notice about
the jigsaw puzzle when you look at it. You see the puzzle, yes, but what you really notice are the missing
pieces. It will be the same with planet earth. Every person’s destiny is something extraordinary—something
no one else has. Only you, and no one else, can achieve
your destiny. The Designer will guide every person so
that he fulfills his purpose and achieves his destiny and
gets his jigsaw puzzle piece in the right place. In doing
so, each person will live the life of his or her deepest
dreams.
“‘Before the telecommunications revolution, it
wasn’t possible for all people to work together. They
could not all communicate with each other to coordinate their efforts. But now, you can be in contact with
people all over the world. Anyone that has a computer
and access to the Internet can be available to every other person on the Internet—throughout the entire world.
While it is true that not everyone is on the Internet yet,
that day is coming, and it is not so far away. In addition
to tremendous growth of bandwidth in urban centers
around the world, rural India and the rest of rural Asia,
rural Latin America, rural Africa, are coming online at
an astounding pace.’
“He stopped again. ‘Oh, does it surprise you that
we know so much about what is going on here on planet earth?’ He went on, ‘When all people can communicate with each other, regardless of the kind of technology, that is the time of the crossover. On the other hand,
the telecommunications revolution and the Internet are
useless in terms of your development without the inher-
204
Coyote to Butterfly
ent values underpinning the universe, without your
compass needle pointing to magnetic North.
“‘The reason for the Design is that these four
puzzles are very difficult, and you are going to have to
all work together to solve them. By working together in
solving them you will change. The character of humankind will change and be different, and be at a higher
level, and be ready to move on to the next stage. You
will learn to work together. Working together is the
way the free universe works.
“‘Your first reaction may be that there is no way
you can do this. Not only have you had very little practice working together with people of different cultures
and languages, but in many cases, you are even at odds
with them. You may not even consider them your
friends. So you will need neutrality, tolerance, and patience, to deal with all that. Let your actions be a soft
wind blowing gently. Be willing to bend like the willow.
“‘Humankind must do something it has never
done before and something that may seem impossible.
But the Designer will help. Only when you can work
together with all the people on planet earth are you
ready to move into the dawning age and out into the
universe. The universe works in harmony. Out of your
free will, you will learn to work together in harmony.
As you do, you will see your horizons open up. You
will see everything in a new way. You will become new
people. You will see the light of a new day. You will be
living the life of your deepest dreams, imagining it into
existence. You will speak it into existence. You will act
it into existence—just as you learned from your study
of the Chana people.
205
Kanatara—The Story
2007
“‘The quarantine I mentioned is to keep earth’s
inhabitants from taking their disharmony into the harmonious universe. Until you reach the next stage in
your development, you cannot leave your solar system.
But once you have come out of your chrysalis, then you
will be able to travel to other stars and other galaxies.
At a still more advanced stage of development, such as
we Alpha Centaurans have reached, you will be able to
travel into other dimensions and other universes.
“‘You know you are ready to leave the chrysalis
and enter the butterfly stage when you are just as much
interested in your neighbor’s welfare as your own,
whether your neighbor is next door or halfway around
the world.
“‘The rest of the galaxy is anxiously awaiting
your departure from the chrysalis. They are eager for
you to join the rest of the intelligent universe. That was
the reason we came. We are interested in your development because we know what glories and joy lie on
the other side of your transition. You may be wondering
how it is that the Designer will assist you.’”
206
25. TUNING IN TO THE CHANNEL
“‘Let us go back to what you learned from the
Chana people. From them you learned about tuning in
to the channel of the Great Spirit. The importance of a
clear channel between you and the Designer cannot be
overestimated. The channel is clear only if your values
are aligned with the values of the universe, your compass needle pointing to magnetic North.
“‘If there is static, background noise, or other
clutter on your channel keeping you from hearing distinctly, it may be due to your surroundings. Maybe your
environment is not one of pakaloh-a, proper principles.
The more you live a life of pakaloh-a, the more you can
be tuned in to the channel. The more you are tuned in to
the channel, the more you can be guided toward living a
life of pakaloh-a. It can go around and around like that
in a virtuous circle that keeps getting better and better.
“‘If you tune in to the Designer on the channel
of values such as honesty, innocence, humility, virtue,
gentleness, and so on, you will come to understand
what is your purpose in life and your destiny. You will
be able to put your puzzle piece in the right place in the
overall plan. Whether you listen to a seashell, look for
messages in the clouds, or find a place of solitude and
contemplation—remember that the Designer has all the
answers and wants to give those answers to all of you
so you can fulfill your design and come out of your
chrysalis.
207
Kanatara—The Story
2007
“‘We can’t tell you how to solve the planet puzzles. Only the Designer can do that. The answers will
come from the Designer, but not to just one of you, or
to just a thousand of you, or a million, or a billion of
you, but to all of you. Tuning into the channel and listening to the Designer and all working together with
transparency, honesty, and innocence, you’re going to
come up with the ways to solve the conundra. You will
come out of your chrysalis and become the advanced
beings you are designed to be. You’ll never be able to
figure it out on your own. That’s not the way the universe works. You’ve got to be on the channel and work
together. It’s not something that groups or committees
acting on their own are going to be able to figure out.
“‘Now there are several more things to tell you
so that you can proceed with the proper development of
Kanatara. Kanatara has a purpose, and it has a destiny.
But we cannot tell you now what these are. Not at this
time. Our first task is to help Kanatara develop and
build a superluminal* spacecraft. We will instruct you
how to build this craft that will travel far faster than the
speed of light. Then we will accompany you in your
spacecraft to Alpha Centauri, to our planet we call Centuron, which revolves around Alpha Centauri much as
your earth revolves around your sun.
“‘There you will spend some time and learn
how Kanatara should proceed in its work as a catalyst
for change in earth’s culture. I have given you the theoretical background of your evolutionary development.
But the practical instructions of how Kanatara is to ful-
*
faster than light
208
Tuning in to the Channel
fill its purpose and achieve its cosmic destiny will be
given to you at Alpha Centauri.
“‘You may wonder why we can’t just tell you
here—why do you have to come to Alpha Centauri? It
is because you would not believe our words. We would
go away and before long, our words would have a diminished impact. In time, they would be almost forgotten. You would not believe what is Kanatara’s purpose
and destiny. But, when you voyage to Alpha Centauri,
on a superluminal flight through a small part of our galaxy, your minds will be greatly expanded. You will
meet the beings on Centuron. By the end of this celestial experience, you will believe what we have to tell
you.’
“At that point,” Kanadave continued, “the Alpha
Centaurans gave us details on how to begin building the
superluminal spacecraft. They walked over to our
LaWhAT and asked for permission to remove one of
the fenders as a sample of Neutramica so they could
better advise us on building our craft. They put the
fender inside their craft.
“They also left us a cylinder with a conical top.
A person can enter the cylinder and have instantaneous
radio communication with the Alpha Centaurans at any
time. The conical top is probably a type of antenna. A
person enters the cylinder, presses a button, and immediately is tuned in to the channel of communication
with the Alpha Centaurans. They told us that tuning in
to the channel and communicating with Alpha Centauri
was functionally similar to tuning in to the channel of
the Designer. We brought the cylinder back in one of
the LaWhATs.
209
Kanatara—The Story
2007
“Then the eight beings walked over to their saucer-like craft and entered it. Shortly, it rose silently and
disappeared into the night sky.”
The audience was silent. After a time, they began whispering, “Lani!* Lani! Lani! Ulumi! Ulumi!
Ulumi!”
After they became still again, Kanadave continued. “First perhaps, we should say just a word about our
superluminal travel, traveling faster than the speed of
light. Once not so long ago, it was thought that nothing
could go faster than light. That would have made our
trip about nine years long, going there and back. But
researchers have duplicated and refined the work of
University of Geneva physicist Nicolas Gisin. His experiment sent two entangled photons through optical
fibers until one came to a two-way mirror where it had
a choice to either bounce off or go through. Whatever
choice was made by the photon, its entangled twin always did just the opposite. This communication between the two photons took place at least 10,000 times
faster than the speed of light.** It appears that this
communication travels instantaneously. It is not apparently connected in any way with the speed of light.
“Thus it should not surprise us that communication to us from Alpha Centauri can take place instantaneously. And, if we can just be open to alternative possibilities, it should not surprise us that they can also
read our minds instantaneously from where they are.
Lani! … Awesome!
Ulumi! … Bright!
**
We gratefully acknowledge this information from Discover Magazine,
May 1, 2009
*
210
Tuning in to the Channel
“So, as the spacecraft is being built, we will be
talking with the Alpha Centaurans to make sure all the
details are correct. Finally after the spacecraft is ready,
the Alpha Centaurans will return for final testing. After
testing, when the craft is declared sound, we will begin
test-flying the vehicle, preparing for our voyage to Alpha Centauri. When we are fully ready to go, the Alpha
Centaurans will return and accompany us to their star
system and planet.”
At this the audience was silent again. It was beginning to dawn on them what all this meant for them
and the generations that would follow them. They were
beginning to understand that this was a cosmic event,
and they were destined to play a part in it. Then slowly
and quietly, they began to chant, “Pono nanah-o
Chana!* Pono nanah-o Chana!” Another group began
to chant slowly and quietly, “Kanatara kaponoh! Kanatara kaponoh!” Then another group began to sing,
“Kanatara kalih-o! Kanatara kalih-o!”
A man from the crowd went to the front, took
the microphone from Kanadave and whispered into it,
“We are just completely blown away! I don’t know
how to say that in Chana, but this day is truly lani.”
Then he began to sing, “Lani, lani, lani,” his voice
reaching ever-higher notes. He ended with a lilting
voice, “Kanatara kalih-o!”
The audience felt a heavy presence. They
swayed back and forth, chanting, “Puma, puma, puma.”
*
Pono nanah-o Chana! … We are the Chana People!
Kanatara kaponoh! … Kanatara moves!
Kanatara kalih-o! … Kanatara forever!
Puma … Heavy
211
Kanatara—The Story
2007
A group of musicians with indigenous instruments took their places on a stage behind the podium.
They began to play songs that had been written on steletae some two thousand years ago.
Takanoh Uh-a-Muh-a Pohoh tani-mah.
The Great Spirit guides the stars.
Takanoh ono Uh-a-Muh-a Pohoh.
The Great Spirit guides us.
Kanatara kapono alu tali ah umuh-oh.
Kanatara is movement toward light and growth.
The audience sang the words they now knew so
well. They swayed back and forth to the music. They
were tuned in to the channel, and they knew it.
212
26. BUILDING THE GALACTA
By the June solstice celebration, much had been
accomplished on building the superluminal spacecraft.
At the gathering in Butterfly Grove, underneath coconut
palms and mango trees, and to the sound of cagou birds,
the people sat quietly.
Kanadave moved to the front of the crowd of
more than 3,000 people celebrating. “Koho,* koho,” he
began, “Pana paki?”
“Pono kama! Pono kama!” The crowd answered
back, “Ana paki?”
“Chicoh kalama.” Kanadave began, holding the
microphone in one hand and a young coconut with a
straw in the other. “Pana hapuh ono kama?”
“Tah! Tah!” the crowd answered back happily.
“Well, it’s been three months since those delightful beings from Alpha Centauri were here. They
have been helping us learn the principles of traveling
far faster than the speed of light and building our superluminal space craft, which we have named the Galacta.”
“Tah! Tah!”
*
Koho … Hello
Pana paki? … How are you all?
Pono kama! … We are good! (We are fine!)
Ana paki? … How are you?
Chicoh kalama. … I have news.
Pana hapuh ono kama? … Can you hear me OK?
Tah! … Yes!
213
Kanatara—The Story
2007
“All the scientists working on anti-gravity, on
improving the air saucer, and on the superluminal space
craft, have moved over to the Chana Spaceport out in
the Chana Desert to do their work. The Chana Spaceport and Technology Center should be almost finished
by the December solstice.
“The scientists have been communicating almost daily with our friends a little over four light years
away. As you know, the Alpha Centaurans gave us a
cylinder to enter, and we think the cone on the top is
some type of transmitter/receiver. Once the cylinder is
entered and a button is pushed, we tune in to instant
communication with our friends. Since they can read
our thoughts from their distant planet, they don’t need
the cylinder, but we do. We can’t read their thoughts!”
The crowd chuckled.
“Anyway, they early on analyzed the Neutramica sample they took back with them so they could tell
us precisely how to construct our craft. Of course, the
spacecraft will be made entirely of Neutramica. The
Alpha Centaurans said that Neutramica is a much better
substance for space travel than any of our metals here
on earth. For one thing, it does not conduct electricity,
unless it is specifically engineered to do so. Most of our
metals here on earth conduct electricity. Metals, they
said, have a grave disadvantage in space. Perhaps it has
something to do with gravity, gravitational fields, or the
curvature of space. They were very pleased with Neutramica. They said Neutramica makes them nama
takuh-o, very happy.
“Our scientists have been working around the
clock, spending a lot of time in the cylinder, tuning in
directly with the Alpha Centaurans. We believe that in
214
Building the Galacta
about three months, we may have a basic prototypical
craft finished and ready to go.”
“Tah! Tah!”
“When it is ready, the Alpha Centaurans will
come here for the testing. Even though our friends will
accompany us all the way to Centuron, they will teach
us celestial navigation. We will learn how to use pulsars, those rapidly rotating neutron stars,* as beacons
for navigation. Each pulsar has its own distinctive pattern of flashes. They spin their beams around the sky
like lighthouses. Most stars look alike, just dots of light,
as you’re traveling through space. That is why the pulsar beacons are so important in celestial navigation. Of
course, for our travel to Alpha Centauri, no pulsars are
necessary—we just head toward their star. But they said
they will show us how to use pulsars for our future
travel throughout the galaxy.
“The Alpha Centaurans believe that by the end
of the year, we will have finished the craft, and the testing will be finalized. Then we will be ready for the superluminal journey to their planet of Centuron in the
Alpha Centauri double-star system. There, as you
know, we will receive advanced guidance on how to
proceed with the proper development of Kanatara.
“You know from what the blurry beings have
already told us that Kanatara has a purpose on earth.
You know that it has to do with humankind coming out
of its chrysalis and entering the next stage of its development. What we don’t know is how we will accomplish that purpose. They will explain that to us on Cen*
Believed to be remnants of supernova explosions, they can weigh as
much as our sun but be only a dozen miles wide (massive but small).
About two thousand have been found so far.
215
Kanatara—The Story
2007
turon. But it appears that Kanatara’s destiny merges
with the destiny of humankind.”
“Tah! Tah! Pono nanah-o Chana!* Kanatara
kaponoh! Kanatara kalih-o!”
Kanadave threw a coconut high in the air.
Catching it, he exclaimed, “You are dismissed to continue your celebration. Have a Chana day! Chalah!
Mahano Chana!”
<><><><><><>
At the December solstice celebration, there was
the usual fun and frivolity—all-night bonfires, imbibing
kava, swimming in the bay. More and more balloons
with gondolas were flying overhead. Throwing flowers
over the assembled crowd was becoming a tradition.
Stands were set up around the assembled crowd
offering a delectable assortment of fruit juices and fruit
salads in half coconut shells—juice combos like pineapple/mango/kiwi and salad combos like banana/nono/
papaya. Other stands offered grilled mahi mahi sandwiches with mango chutney, grilled monchong with
sugar cane, pecan and kiwi, while other stands offered
cacao, kava, vanilla, and maca milkshakes. There was a
growing number of musical groups, some indigenous,
some contemporary, some classical. The indigenous
ones were the most popular. One of the most popular
*
Pono nanah-o Chana! … We are the Chana people!
Kanatara kaponoh! … Kanatara moves!
Kanatara kalih-o! … Kanatara forever!
Chalah! … Good-bye!
Mahano Chana! … Have a Chana day!
216
Building the Galacta
indigenous groups was Kamalani, which means, Thank
you.
Kanadave, Kanadoug, and Jepe came to the
front of the group and stood in front of the podium.
Jepe spoke first. “As you know, since March we have
been communicating with our friends on Centuron in
the Alpha Centauri star system. And you know, they
have been advising us on building the Galacta, our superluminal spacecraft. They came back to earth to test
the spacecraft. First they tested the craft by themselves
alone. Then, when they were satisfied that it was completely safe, they tested it with us. This project is now
finished.”
The crowd began to shout and dance. They beat
drums and blew horns. “Tah! Tah! Pono nanah-o
Chana! Kanatara kaponoh! Kanatara kalih-o!”
“Our friends have also helped us improve our
anti-gravity understanding which in turn has improved
our air saucer. As you know, the air saucers will be
used for going to those parts of our beloved island
where the Monorail does not go and where it would
take a very long time by LaWhAT, our large-wheeled
all-terrain vehicle.
“I should also mention that the Chana Spaceport
is nearly finished. We have a fleet of ten air saucers that
make their home there.”
Kanadave took the microphone from Jepe. “You
may be interested to know that the Grand Kahali Hotel
is nearly finished, although additional wings will be
added as necessary to accommodate additional newcomers.”
Kanadave gave the mike back to Jepe, and he
continued. “I also want to announce that persona Gali-
217
Kanatara—The Story
2007
leo and his team have placed a superb telescope at the
top of Mt. HaKatana, at 18,914 feet (5765 km). As you
might surmise, it was the air saucer that made such an
installation possible. A world-renowned group of astronomers are now using the telescope. The construction people and the food people have worked closely
with the group for their comfort and nutrition. With the
crystal-clear views at the top of HaKatana, it is expected that research will be done here that can be done
nowhere else in the world.”
Kanadoug took the mike, “We now have over
3,700 happy Kanatarans living on our resplendent island. Next year, with two trips, there will be more people, because the waiting list is growing. The Andromeda 1500 has finally gone through its final tests and is
ready for sailing. The shipbuilders have done an incredible job. That means next year, we should have 3,000
more people for our December solstice celebration.”
“Tah! Tah!” the crowd yelled as they stood up
and applauded.
“And finally, I would like to say that work is
nearly finished on the Kamakala Hot Springs and Ski
Resort. It is going to be truly, truly beautiful. Now, just
imagine yourself taking the Mini-Mono up into the Tara
Mountains. Then, imagine a day of skiing with views of
snow-covered mountains all around you. After that, as
the sun is going down, you have a delicious five-course
dinner. Then, later in the evening, you enter one of the
hot tubs of salubrious mineral water, really hot, with
snow falling all around you. When you get so hot you
want to get out, you go jump into deep snow until
you’re so cold, you want to go back into the hot tub.
When you’ve had enough of the hot tub and the deep
218
Building the Galacta
snow, you go back to your suite where a log fire is
burning, and you snuggle close with one you love. Now
is that paradise or not?”
The crowd shouted its applause. “Tah! Tah!”
When the applause settled down, Kanadave took
the mike. “I think that’s about it for this year. You have
all done an incredibly wonderful job.”
Just then a barrage of orchids fell on his head
from the hydrogen-e balloon with gondola that had maneuvered over him. “Let’s give Kanatara and all of you
a rousing, resounding applause.”
“Tah! Tah!” the crowd responded and filled the
air with applause.
“Chalah!” he said as he looked over the crowd.
“And have a Chana day! Mahano Chana!” He was covered with orchids. “You are the greatest people in the
world! “Pana nanah-o poho!*”
The audience applauded and then burst into
song. “Pono nanah-o Chana! Kanatara kaponoh! Kanatara kalih-o!”
The crowd dispersed and headed to the beach to
continue their solstice celebration.
*
Pana nanah-o poho! … You are great people!
219
Kanatara—The Story
220
2007
2008
27. SUPERLUMINAL STAR FLIGHT
It is difficult to describe the atmosphere at the
Chana Spaceport on that January morning. This would
be man’s first interstellar space voyage, and the world
at large didn’t even know about it. Very little news got
out from Kanatara. The newcomers were all coming to
Kanatara, and almost no one was going back from
Kanatara. When the Andromeda picked up people from
around the world, its presence was little noticed beyond
the port areas where they docked. That was probably all
for the good at this point.
The air was electric with anticipation. Nearly
everyone on the island had taken the Mini-Mono to the
Chana Spaceport. It had taken most of the night and a
good part of the morning to get everyone there. The
food people, as usual, had prepared well for the occasion and were feeding the large crowd. When it was
time for lunch, they served mahi mahi with mango
sauce over wild rice with kanacotti green beans. From
tea growing on the sides of the Tara Mountains, they
served up iced tea with sweet lemons. The crowd enjoyed wild ufi yam pudding for dessert. One would
never go hungry on Kanatara!
The beautiful silver superluminal spacecraft was
on the LTO field. LTO stood for Landing/Take Off. It
was a large, flat field of grass. Surrounding the LTO
221
Kanatara—The Story
2008
field was a larger field of grass and flowers where the
people sat with umbrellas and sunglasses. The spacecraft was in front of them.
A scientist whose persona was Luminala came
in front of the crowd. She took a microphone and spoke
to the crowd. “Koho!*”
The crowd answered back, “Chalah!”
“Isn’t it beautiful?” Luminala said in a swooning voice.
“Lani!” the crowd swooned back. “Lani! Lani!
Lani!”
“You can all come forward to the spacecraft,
touch it, get inside of it. It belongs to you. Galacta belongs to all of you. Come on up and see it close. Touch
it. Climb inside. Once this craft takes off, you may not
see it for a year or more.”
A few people moved out of the crowd and
moved toward the craft. Soon, a few more began to
move, and then the whole crowd swarmed toward and
around the Galacta.
“Oooeeeh!” squealed one little girl. “I wish I
could ride in it.”
“Maybe you will one day,” someone suggested.
“You never know.”
It was late in the afternoon before the crowd had
its fill of this splendiferous craft. It was about 100 feet
long (30.48 m) and about ten feet (3.05 m) high, sitting
off the ground about another eight or nine feet (2.6 m).
Retractable stairs led down to the ground. There were
large portholes in the sides, all the way around. These
*
Koho! … Hello!
Chalah! … Hello!
Lani! … Awesome!
222
Superluminal Star Flight
would allow the fortunate passengers to see the stars as
they traveled through space to their destination some
4.37 light years away.
Kanadave, Kanadoug, Jepe, their wives and the
five children were the eleven passengers for the voyage.
They came to the front with broad smiles on their faces.
The five children had grown up now—seven years older than when they first came to the island. They were
Kanadave and Kanajulia’s children: Torr, now 16 and
working with the Monorail, Chetley, now 21 and working with the telescope team on Mt. HaKatana, and Yenia, now 24 and working in tropical medical research;
Kanadoug and Kanamarion’s children: Glynna, now 18
and working in food production, and Karina, now 21
and working on the Andromeda cruise ships.
Kanajulia took a microphone. “We expect to
come back with all the details of what Kanatara’s role
and purpose are for humankind and planet earth.”
Kanamarion took a mike. “We know that is a
pretty tall order, but that’s what we were told by our
friends who want to help us.
“And so it is with that in mind,” she continued,
“that we take so seriously this trip to Alpha Centauri.
And our friends there take this trip most seriously as
well. One of the things they reminded us as we communicated through their cylinder was that they have
been watching us for the last couple of thousand years.”
“Yes,” Kanajulia continued, “and they believe
that now is the time to move. To move toward our destiny as humankind.”
223
Kanatara—The Story
2008
“Kanatara kaponoh!*” The crowd cried out in
agreement. “Hagah-o pono!”
Kanamarion continued. “As we understand it,
Koteri could have told us everything when we first met
him. Or they could have told us everything through the
cylinder. Or they could have visited us again and told
us everything. But they believe none of this would be
successful. They believe we must actually travel to Alpha Centauri, see another star system, and spend time
on another planet. Only by our going there, experiencing another world and another type of being, will we be
prepared for the challenges ahead. It is not enough to
have the answers intellectually. Apparently, we must
have the actual physical experience.”
Luminala asked for questions. Young men
dashed about the crowd holding up microphones so
people with questions could speak and the whole crowd
could easily hear.
“Will you be able to communicate with us while
you are on your voyage?” asked a woman in a red dress
with yellow flowers.
Luminala answered, “No, once they are gone,
we will hear nothing from them until they return. At the
Alpha Centaurans’ request, the cylinder with the conical top will be taken back with them in the craft.”
On toward dusk, the craft began to glow. The
eleven passengers bade their last farewell to the crowd.
A woman with eleven large blue balloons moved to the
front of the crowd and gave a balloon to each voyager.
So many people were hugging and kissing them, it was
*
Kanatara kaponoh! … Kanatara moves!
Hagah-o pono! … Our destiny!
224
Superluminal Star Flight
difficult for them to board the craft. They all held onto
their balloons as they struggled to go up the stairs. Finally they reached the top and waved good-bye from
the open door. Then the door closed. Lights came on
inside the craft and the crowd could see them inside.
Finally, darkness settled down upon the illuminant craft and the crowd. Exterior lights on the craft
shone forth. Then the craft began to slowly rise. Up,
higher and higher it rose until it met with the craft from
Alpha Centauri which would accompany the Galacta all
the way to Centuron. Finally the two craft were out of
sight.
225
Kanatara—The Story
226
2008
Skip the next chapter unless you
want to read all about Kanatara City.
Just go to Chapter 29.
RETURN FROM ALPHA CENTAURI
.
227
Kanatara—The Story
228
2008
28. KANATARA CITY—
CITY OF AWAKENING DAWN
It was the June solstice celebration in Butterfly
Grove. Everyone relaxed and waited for the announcements. Flying over the crowd were hydrogen-e balloons
of many colors, with their gondolas beneath. The crowd
could see the occupants looking out over the sides of
their gondolas. From time to time, the balloons dropped
hibiscus or bougainvillea blossoms over the side and
onto the celebrating crowd. There were many food
stands set up around the gathering, serving such delectables as papaya-pecan-maca milkshakes, pineapplemango-macadamia salads, and grilled ahi sandwiches
with avocado, mango, and almonds on the side.
BuildEm came to the front and took a microphone. “Koho!*”
“Chalah!” the crowd answered back.
“Pana Paki?”
“Pono kama!” the crowd answered again.
“Well, it’s another beautiful solstice celebration,
and as usual, we have good news for you.”
“Tah! Tah!” the crowd exclaimed.
*
Koho! … Hello!
Chalah! … Hello!
Pana Paki? … How are you all?
Pono kama! … We are good! (We are fine!)
Tah! … Yes!
229
Kanatara—The Story
2008
“Our basic Monorail system is now complete,
although we will be adding many Monorail lines in the
future. This system includes all the bicycle paths and
hiking paths adjacent to the Monorail lines. We also are
constructing bicycle and hiking trails in other parts of
the island. The bicycle/hiking trail system includes inns
and campgrounds every twenty-five miles (40 km). For
out-of-way locations where there are no inns, there will
at least be food and water available.
“We also have condo developments starting up
at Kahali Beach, Ulumi Lake, Kamakala Hot Springs,
and out near the Chana Spaceport. Also, Kanakuli Village is being developed, where the Kanakuli River enters the Pacific. There will also be small developments
at the Monorail stops every 25 miles (40 km). So there
will be plenty of possibilities where people can live and
work. On the drawing boards are Rain Forest Village
and Cloud Forest Village.
“The construction of Kanatara City is growing
every day. I would like to take a little time and tell you
about Kanatara City, our central city and extravaganza.
Many of you have taken the Monorail up there—we say
‘up there’ rather than ‘over there’ because Kanatara
City is about three thousand feet (914 m) higher in elevation than we are here. Those of you who have gone
up to Kanatara City have personally seen the enormity
of the construction going on. From all indications, there
are going to be vast numbers of people coming to Kanatara, and the construction people are working overtime
to meet the expected demand for places to live.
“Many of you may end up living in Kanatara
City. A large percentage of our population will almost
certainly live there. Because of its elevation, it will
230
Kanatara City—City of Awakening Dawn
have a delightful year-round spring-like climate. It will
be the cultural center of the island. That’s where the
opera and the symphony will be. That’s where most
museums and Kanaversity will be. Kanatara City will
be known as the City of Awakening Dawn, Pohohanako Matika Unami.”
“Tah! Tah!” The crowd cried out as they stood
up and applauded. “Poho-hanako Matika Unami.”
When the applause died down, BuildEm asked,
“Would you like to know why?”
“Tah! Tah!” The crowd answered back.
“Well, one reason is that from the beginning of
our adventure here on Kanatara, our planned central
city has always been to our east—where the dawn
awakens. It all started here at Kahali Bay. This is where
the first tents were. This is where the first domes were.
This is where we all disembarked. This is where we
have had our solstice gatherings. Here were our beginnings on the island, and from here, dawn always awakened in the direction of what would be Kanatara City.
At every solstice celebration, as we see the dawn awaken, it is always toward the east and our future Kanatara
City. So in this sense, our future central city has always
been the City of Awakening Dawn, Poho-hanako Matika Unami.
“Secondly, Kanatara is the awakening dawn in
all of our individual lives. Whether we came through
the Barrier Storms in small sailing vessels or in the
greater comfort of an Andromeda cruise ship, we began
to come awake as we experienced the deep peace and
clarity of the island. From our first moments in Kanatara, we slowly began to wake up from the slumber of the
life we had left behind. We have come awake to what is
231
Kanatara—The Story
2008
ego and what is real. We have come awake to a life of
service and joy, a life of purpose and destiny. So for us
individually, Kanatara has been an awakening dawn.
Kanatara City, the center of our cultural and community
life, represents that to us.
“Third, perhaps Kanatara will be the awakening
dawn for all of humankind. We are awakening to our
future—our destiny that lies before us. Remember that
Koteri said our voyagers to Alpha Centauri would return with instructions about how Kanatara should proceed in its work as a catalyst for change in earth’s culture. This would certainly be an awakening dawn.
Kanatara City, the center of Kanatara life—as that life
spreads across the globe—will represent that awakening
dawn to everyone.
“Now, let’s talk about Kanatara City itself.
Kanatara City will be a city designed like no other in
the world. Since we use Neutramica in all our construction, we are not bound by the straight lines we find in
most of the buildings of the world. Here in Kanatara,
some of the world’s finest architects and designers have
used the strength of Neutramica to fashion a city that is
generally without straight lines. Every building incorporates smooth, enticing, curved lines in its structure.
“Also, since Neutramica has the characteristic
of being able to change its color at the push of buttons,
the variety of colors within Kanatara City will be like
no other city in the world. The skyline will be a beautiful mélange of color and form. At night, the buildings
will have a changing, subtle, soft, glow-in-the-dark appearance that will be unlike anywhere else.
“Once you are in the center of the city, MiniMonos will help you get around. The Bogas, or BOtan-
232
Kanatara City—City of Awakening Dawn
ical GArdenS, will take up eight square miles (21 sq.
km) in the middle of the city. The Kanakuli River with
its sparkling, clear water will run through the middle of
the gardens. Eight square miles of flowers, shrubs, and
trees from all over Kanatara, and eventually from all
over the world.”
Several young people had erected large projection screens in front of the crowd. Others operated
computers, projecting images on the screens.
“We are projecting on the large screens in front
of you the plans for the Bogas and surrounding boroughs. Each borough is a module with high-rise condos
for about 50,000 condo units. All the boroughs together
will provide about a half million residences. Of course,
we don’t plan on needing this many residences any time
soon, but you can see the possibilities for the future.
“Around the Bogas you will find most of the
larger stores and galleries of the city. The second level
will have offices and restaurants. The third level and
above will be residences.
“The following is a list of attractions inside the
Botanical Gardens:
WEST BOGA
1
Technology Museum
2
Science Museum
3
Chana Archaeological Museum
4
Planetarium and Observatory
5
Gallery of Art
6
Opera House
7
Symphony Hall
8
Gallery of Design
233
Kanatara—The Story
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
2008
EAST BOGA
Museum of Natural History
Aquarium
Free Aviary (birds free to come and go)
Theater
Music Hall
Planning Hall
Library
Conference Center
“Mini-Monos will take you to all these locations. The bridge over the crystal-clear Kanakuli River
in the middle of the Bogas will have food pavilions at
each end, so you won’t go hungry while you’re spending time in the Bogas. There will be ponds, filled with
Kanakuli mountain water from the Tara Mountains.
“There will be walking paths and bicycle paths
throughout the Bogas. You may use your own bicycles
or use the many public bicycles abundantly located
throughout Kanatara City for the use of residents. Special bicycle teams will have the job of moving the public bicycles around so they will always be available no
matter where you are in the city.
“Pedicycle ‘cabs’ holding a number of people
will also be available for those who prefer to ride together. These can be pedaled by two or three people. If
you prefer to be driven, there will be pedicycle cabs
manned by volunteer ‘cabbies.’”
The computer projected another image on the
screens.
“On the screens, you now see the twelve boroughs where the residents will live, extending out from
the Bogas. Mini-Monos will run through the Bogas,
234
Kanatara City—City of Awakening Dawn
through the boroughs, and through each of the four
Green Areas. Each Green area campus comprises approximately fifteen square miles (39 sq. km) of hiking
paths, green grass, bushes, trees, forests, as well as botanical specimens from all over Kanatara. Additional
boroughs can be built on the outsides of the Green Areas for an additional 1.5 million residential units.
“Three of the Green Areas will include campuses of Kanaversity—one for Science and Technology,
another for The Arts, Design and Music, and another
for Life Sciences and Medicine. The latter will include
Kanaversity Research Hospital. The fourth Green Area
will be for parks and open areas, as well as for sports.
“Within each Green Area there will be a lake
with clear mountain water from the Kanakuli River.
Electronic kiosks for news and general information will
be placed throughout the Bogas and the Green Areas
for residents when you are out and about.
“Kanaversity is expected to be a worldrenowned university attracting outstanding talent from
all over the globe. Because of Kanatara’s early days of
attracting outstanding scientists and technology talent,
its science departments will be leading academic technology centers. Research into food production will be
first rate because of Kanatara’s unique history in this
area. Architecture and the arts are already drawing interest as leading architects, artists, filmmakers, writers,
and musicians desire to live in Kanatara. And, if they
desire to live outside the city, that is easy to do because
of the Monorail system.
“Kanaversity will teach a myriad of subjects
because we have so much to learn. The motto of Ka-
235
Kanatara—The Story
2008
naversity is, ‘Teach what you know. Learn what you
want to know.’”
Jepe took the microphone. “BuildEm is the head
of all the construction he has told you about. Let’s give
him a big round of applause.”
The crowd stood and gave him a sustained ovation.
Jepe dismissed the crowd to a continuing celebration. “Chalah!* Have a Chana day! Mahano
Chana!”
<><><><><><>
The December solstice celebration continued
the tradition of night bonfires on the beach, music and
dancing, and imbibing kava throughout the night. The
next morning there were announcements in Butterfly
Grove. BuildEm came to the front. “Katana, pana
nanah-o kama!”
The crowd responded, “Kamalani! Ana paki?”
“Ono paki!” BuildEm exclaimed, holding half a
coconut with a straw in his hand. “I would like to announce that we have almost 7,000 happy residents on
the island now.
“We wish our interstellar voyagers the very best
on their celestial journey to Alpha Centauri to learn
*
Chalah! … Good-bye
Mahano Chana! … Have a Chana day!
Katana, pana nanah-o kama! … Welcome, you good people!
Kamalani! … Thank you!
Ana paki? … How are you?
Ono paki! … I am good! (I am fine!)
236
Kanatara City—City of Awakening Dawn
more of Kanatara’s hagah, its purpose, and hagah-o, its
destiny. Let us wish them well.”
“Tah! Tah! Kanatara haga!* Kanatara hagah-o!
Kanatara kalih-o!”
“Well, it’s time to say Chalah, until our next
celebration. Be well and may you understand ana haga,
your purpose, and achieve ana hagah-o, your destiny.
Have a Chana day! Mahano Chana!”
“Tah! Tah! Chalah! Mahano Chana!” Then
they went away to continue their solstice celebration.
*
Kanatara haga! … Kanatara’s purpose!
Kanatara hagah-o! … Kanatara’s destiny!
Kanatara kalih-o! … Kanatara forever!
237
Kanatara—The Story
238
2008
Kanatara—The Story
2009
2009
29. RETURN FROM ALPHA CENTAURI
The silver spacecraft descended toward the
Chana Spaceport. The people in the tower saw it first
and ran shouting onto the field. Their shouting brought
others out to the field. Many people worked at the
Chana Spaceport. The word spread, and soon all were
waiting until the craft touched the ground. The accompanying craft from Alpha Centauri hovered high above
the silver Galacta until they saw the passengers come
through the door and descend to the ground. Then it
ascended and disappeared.
The eleven passengers returning from man’s
first interstellar voyage were joyous. Their faces were
beaming. Their eyes were very big! As the adventurers
descended from the craft, they still had their blue balloons. The voyagers were surrounded by their fellow
earthlings. They hugged and kissed their friends and coworkers, who wanted to know all about their voyage
and adventure.
Someone ran up with a microphone to capture
the first words of earth’s first interstellar travelers returning from their voyage. Kanadave was the first to
speak. “Brothers and sisters, what we have beheld . . .
what we have come to understand . . . what we have
apprehended . . . is something no earthling has ever experienced . . . what no earth person can imagine. Now
239
Kanatara—The Story
2009
we understand the beam, the channel that each of us has
from the Mighty One. We were goggle-eyed. We can’t
begin to tell you. We can’t even begin to describe . . .
we can’t even begin . . . we can’t . . .”
Kanadave was choked up. His eyes were full of
tears. He couldn’t go on until he regained his composure.
After a pause, Kanadave began again. “The
presence we all feel here is but a small vapor of the
presence we felt at Alpha Centauri, the presence of the
Mighty One, the presence of the Infinite. When we
started talking about the Great Spirit and the Designer,
they quoted a poem to us, composed here on earth,
which we did not know. We were not familiar with it.
If the radiance of a thousand suns
Were to burst at once into the sky,
*
That would be like the splendor of the Mighty One.
“This was the presence that we felt, the presence
of Infinitude. We talk about a different dimension here
in Kanatara. Well, we certainly experienced another
dimension out there! Now, we know why we had to go
there. Now, we know why the Alpha Centaurans
couldn’t just tell us. . . .”
Trying to have a measure of composure, and
recognizing that he was really back on earth, he exclaimed, “We saw so much in the two or three weeks
we were gone!”
*
From the Bhagavad Gita, considered as one of the most important philosophical classics of the world. Believed to have been composed between the 5th and 2nd centuries BCE. We believe this poem is in the
public domain. If not, please let us know so we can ascribe credit.
240
Return from Alpha Centauri
“Two or three weeks? You were gone over a
year!” yelled someone in the crowd.
“What was that?” Kanadave asked over the tumult.
“You were gone for more than a year!” someone
else shouted in response.
Kanadave was incredulous. “I think I misunderstood you,” he said laughingly. “I thought you said we
were gone more than a year. All our blue balloons
would have gone down if we had been gone that long.”
“Yes,” someone said. “That’s right. You left in
January of last year, and here it is March of this year.”
Then it dawned on everyone that Einstein’s
clocks explained it. No matter what speed the observer
is moving at, he will always measure the speed of light
at 186,000 miles (299,338 km) per second. In 1905 Einstein’s special theory of relativity stated that such observers could all measure the same speed of light if one
abandoned the idea of a universal time. Rather, they
would all have their own individual time, both the passengers on the Galacta and those on earth, as measured
by the clock that each carried with him. As Einstein
pointed out, the clocks moving at high speed would differ considerably from those clocks which were moving
slowly in relation to the other clocks.
In superluminal travel, like on the Galacta, the
voyagers’ clocks would possibly stop altogether. The
Galacta had spent two or three weeks in Alpha Centauri, and the travel time to get there was brief from the
perspective of those aboard the spacecraft. Total travel
time from the perspective of those on earth was more
than 14 months.
241
Kanatara—The Story
2009
“Well,” Kanadoug said, “whether we’ve been
gone two or three weeks or more than a year, it is wonderful to be back on our dear planet. We have so much
to share.”
Kanajulia exclaimed, “We had fourteen months
of experience in the two or three weeks we were gone,
that’s for sure! And it was an incredible, word-defying,
concept-defying, experience. And it seems funny that
we don’t even know if it was two weeks or three weeks.
Time just all ran together. So much was happening.
“You know, when we trekked into the interior
of the island in 2005 and 2006 and had those long years
to think—we kept asking ourselves, why couldn’t planet earth be like Kanatara? But we had no answers, only
questions. Koteri gave us answers, but at Alpha Centauri, we understood how to get there.”
Kanamarion gently interrupted, “But before we
tell you anything, we know that everyone on the island
wants to hear all about it. Why don’t we save it until we
can all get together?”
SaucerHead suggested, “It’s almost the equinox,
why don’t we wait for that celebration and share everything with everybody?”
Kanajulia responded, “That sounds like a good
idea and will give us a chance to recharge our batteries.
We took in so much that it would be nice to take a little
rest first. It will also give us a chance to catch up on
what’s been going on here for fourteen months. Hard to
believe . . . fourteen months.” And that’s what they did.
At the equinox in March, all gathered in Butterfly Grove in front of Kahali Bay as always. There were
more than 8,000 residents on the island now. The sound
242
Return from Alpha Centauri
system was constantly expanding so the larger and larger crowds at each gathering could hear from one of the
many speakers close by.
The sounds of the birds in the trees, the butterflies everywhere, the smell of hibiscus and gardenias,
the warm breezes, the swaying palms, the beautiful bay
in front of them—all these reminded the interstellar
travelers of how beautiful is planet earth. Jepe and
Kanashelly came to the podium first, followed by the
other voyagers.
Kanashelly took a mike and began, “I don’t
usually say too much. I’m the quiet one.” The crowd
chuckled. “But, sisters and brothers, I have to tell you
that all of us are more in love with earth than we ever
were before. The celestial magnificence of our voyage
was far beyond description.
“The beauty of traveling through space cannot
be imagined. The glory of outer space cannot be described in words. Even poetry and music would not do
it justice. But to us, there is nothing more beautiful than
planet earth and our beautiful Kanatara. We spent two
or three weeks communicating with the advanced intelligent life on Centuron. We experienced wonders almost impossible to describe.”
Kanajulia, her eyes sparkling with excitement,
took a mike and spoke with emotion. “And the universe
. . . we have such a small idea about it from our perspective on earth. We saw how big it is, and even then,”
she laughed, “we only saw a tiny, tiny part of it. It is SO
big!
“And we experienced the Mighty One, the Great
Spirit, the Infinite One, in a way that was never possible
on earth. We don’t know why, but we don’t feel the
243
Kanatara—The Story
2009
presence here like we did there. Not at all! Nevertheless, we can receive all the guidance we need if we tune
in to the hakalo, the channel that Koteri told us about. If
fulfilling our purpose becomes our only goal in life,
then we are in complete harmony with the universe—
that big, big universe. Now, I’m going to let Kanadave
tell you more about it.”
Kanadave went forward, smiling broadly, and
took a mike. “You remember the Mighty One in that
poem I recited when we came out of the Galacta? Since
then, you have all passed that poem around. Well, that
Mighty One will communicate to you in a very personal
way. We found out—out there—that this is the way the
universe works. The Great One is the source of our inner strength and character, our guidance and direction
We just need to stay on the beam, stay tuned in to the
channel.
“Out there, among the stars and the vastness of
space, we got a much better idea about the way things
are—the whole bigger picture. It is much bigger than
we ever imagined—the whole plan, everything. Koteri
gave us hints with the Designer, but we got a very clear
idea at Alpha Centauri. Now, we know why we had to
go there. Telling us about all this would not have done
it. We had to experience it. . . .
“If you think about it, the Infinite One, in ultimate wisdom, would not have left us without guidance—not if there is a plan to fulfill, a direction that we
are headed, a destiny for humankind to achieve. How
could each of us know what is our purpose in life without that purpose being communicated to us? How could
we know where to expend our energies? We would be
flying blind. We would be a plane flying without a pi-
244
Return from Alpha Centauri
lot. And where would that communication come from?
It’s all quite logical really. The Chana people listened to
seashells and looked for messages in the clouds, but
ultimately the message had to come from the Great One
in a very personal way to each person.
“Like the Chana people believed, the Great
Spirit does not wish to be worshipped but rather desires
us to live by pakaloh-a, proper principles, and then be
guided so we can fulfill our purpose and move on to the
next stage of our development . . . and to the next stage
after that . . . and the next stage after that. . . . This is
the great plan. There is always further development in
our destiny.”
Jepe smiled at everyone, took a mike, and began, “One of the things that really struck us about the
Alpha Centaurans was their complete makoh-a, harmony. There is no concho, disharmony, at all. They have a
makuh-a, a peace, that reaches very far down deep inside of them. We learned that Alpha Centaurans and
much of the rest of the universe have reached a point in
their development that is wise far beyond what we experience here on earth. Yet, they told us again and again
that we have the same capacity for kanamana, wisdom,
and kachapoh-a, correct action, as they have.”
Kanadoug approached the podium and took a
mike. “I think it would be good to say something about
Alpha Centauri, earth’s nearest star, since we now have
friends there. You may already know that Alpha Centauri is the brightest star in the southern constellation of
Centaurus, being a mere 4.37 light years away. From
our vantage there, on the planet Centuron, we saw our
sun in the constellation Cassiopeia. Alpha Centauri is
an established binary star system in close orbit. Seen
245
Kanatara—The Story
2009
from earth, it is the third brightest star in the sky. Without a telescope, it appears to be a single star.
“Most of the night sky appeared very much as it
does for us here on earth, except of course, the constellation Centaurus was missing its brightest star. Most of
the familiar constellations like Ursa Major, the Big
Dipper, and Orion appeared almost unchanged. Bright
stars relatively close to us, however, such as Sirius,
Procyon, and Altair, were in markedly different sky positions. Sirius, for example, was a part of Orion, some 2
degrees west of Betelgeuse, and shining dimmer than
we know it.”
Kanamarion came to the podium and took a
mike. “Now, the island population has grown while we
were away. There are quite a lot of you who were not
here when we left. So, for you, we want to say a word
about how our original contact with Alpha Centauri and
this entire voyage came about.
“Kanatara is outside the hierarchical architecture of planet earth, and we had been living within the
rules of the universe without actually realizing it. Living by the rules of the universe made us qualified to be
contacted by beings on Centuron, the principal planet of
Alpha Centauri. It is a well-known fact in our galaxy
that earth is in the chrysalis or pre-butterfly stage, to
use a metaphor, and that we have much work to do before we are able to move on to the next stage in our
progress as humankind. The universe is eager to have
us among them—to come out of our chrysalis and join
with them.
“When we finally arrived, the Centaurans graciously thanked us for coming and were very eager to
help us. They happily shared with us the destiny of hu-
246
Return from Alpha Centauri
mankind and our planet—as well as the lessons that we
earthlings need to learn in order to take the next step in
our development. The specific purpose of our voyage
was to determine the true purpose and destiny of Kanatara for planet earth. We wanted to know exactly why
we were contacted, what we should do, and how we
should do it. In their kanamana, their wisdom, they
freely shared this information with us.
“First, they told us that there are rules in the
universe—rules which are not difficult to understand.
Until we learn and live by these rules, we will be confined to planet earth. Except for an occasional meager
space probe here and there within our planetary system,
we are essentially quarantined, so to speak, from the
rest of the universe. We will be unable to travel even
intra-galactically, let alone travel throughout the universe and enter other dimensions. We are confined to
our solar system until we live by these rules.
“Let me now share with you these rules.
1.
Honesty. Any type of fraud or deception
is forbidden.
2.
No initiation of force (or threat of force)
against another.
3.
Working together in harmony.
4.
Living the life of your deepest dreams.
“Following the Design, the universe works and
lives by these rules. But these rules must be learned.
247
Kanatara—The Story
2009
We have the capacity to learn these rules, but we must
go through the process of learning them. This has to do
with our free will. Because we have a mind, we cannot
be instinctually programmed to follow these rules. Because we have free will, we have to learn to live by
them.
“The Alpha Centaurans were hopeful that we
could soon be aligned with the pakaloh-a, proper principles, of the rest of the universe and awake to true reality and our true possibilities and destiny. They told us
that there are many planets in various stages of development. But none of them is free until the lessons are
learned. Each type of planet has different problems or
predicaments to teach the beings on that planet how
they must live.
“As we learned from our first contact with Koteri and the blurry beings, our type of planet and intelligent life has designed within it the four punupunu-mah,
conundra, or puzzles—war, poverty, disease, and ignorance. We must solve these before we can be free to
express our destiny within the greater universe. Solving, punani in Chana, these conundra will require us all
to work together. Working together will teach us the
lessons we need to learn.
“The universe works together as a harmonious
whole, and that is why we were accepted so warmly by
the beings on Centuron. They understood Kanatara’s
desire to awaken to our destiny as earthlings to be free
in the universe. They stressed again and again that it is
only as everyone harmoniously becomes part of the solution to the conundra that these puzzles can be solved,
and we can move on.
248
Return from Alpha Centauri
“One further thing they told us. ‘Do not hurt the
rigid systems operating in the world, in the same way
that you must not damage the chrysalis while the butterfly is inside. Once the butterfly is out and free, the
chrysalis will deteriorate and be blown away with the
wind.’”
249
Kanatara—The Story
250
2009
30. GOING GLOBAL ON THE INTERNET
Kanadoug took over the discourse. “The Alpha
Centaurans told us that only now, for the first time in
our history, can planet earth solve its conundra. They
have been waiting a long time for mankind to develop
the technology where every person can contact everyone else. For the first time, humankind has the technology to sit around a giant council table and talk together.
This technology, in its infancy and taking baby steps, is
the Internet. The geometry of the earth will now begin
to change. There is a new algebra at work.
“The evolution of the Internet will propel humankind into the coming age. The Internet makes it
possible for everyone’s imagination, dreams, and genius to combine and touch each other. The Internet cannot
be compared with inventions like the printing press or
the airplane. Rather, the Internet is like man’s discovery
of fire. Man has discovered electronic fire, and with it is
coming a sea change, a tidal wave, in man’s development.
“As Koteri told us, we are a giant jigsaw puzzle
with 7+ billion pieces. Each person is a piece in the jigsaw puzzle. The puzzle will not be complete until every
piece is in its place. When the rag picker half-way
around the world has access to the Internet, and that day
is coming soon, then his destiny has come alive—
charged with the electrons speeding around the world as
he talks, as he listens. Up to now, people could not
251
Kanatara—The Story
2009
communicate their puzzle pieces to each other because
they could not communicate with each other. Now, we
all can—a peasant girl in Maharashtra, a scientist at
MIT, a boy growing up in the slums of Mexico City, a
computer scientist in Japan, a secretary in Dallas. We
now can access the brilliance and intuition, the energy
and intelligence, the knowledge and wisdom of every
one—a gendarme in Paris, a surfer in Malibu, a student
in Guangdong, a lab technician in Chittagong, a financial analyst in Cairo, a shepherd in the mountains of
Nepal, a fisherman in Sumatra.
“They told us on Centuron that because the Internet is central to the whole crossover, Kanatara must
have a global Internet site to connect everyone. It’s a
pretty simple idea, really, to get a web site and find developers to write the code. We can translate the Kanatara culture onto the web site and tell people about the
island and how we see the destiny of Kanatara. As people join the culture, they begin to participate in the
transformation of humankind from coyote to advanced
being. We have checked and found that kanatara.com is
available. We have now acquired that domain name for
our island.”
“Tah!* Tah!” the crowd cheered. “Kanatara kaponoh!”
Kanashelly asked for a mike and spoke. “Kanatara’s destiny is to be a catalyst for the combined brilliance of people working together to solve the conundra
and leave our chrysalis behind.
*
Tah! … Yes!
Kanatara kaponoh! ... Kanatara moves!
252
Going Global on the Internet
“Let me tell you just a little about the plans the
Alpha Centaurans gave us for the web site. It needs to
do four very important things. First of all, it will be the
central communication medium for “…earth’s first web
country.” Let’s talk about that.”
253
Kanatara—The Story
254
2009
31. THE EXPLODING KANATARA CULTURE
A young man in a flowered koho* shirt came to
the front with a platter of young coconuts with straws.
He gave one coconut to each of the six voyagers. Kanadave took his and thanked him. “Thank you, my friend.
You must have read our minds. . . .” Taking a long sip
from the straw, he laughed and said, “Oh, and it’s very
cold, too! Very delicious! Kamalani! Kamalani from all
of us.”
Kanajulia was at his side and had her coconut.
She smiled as she took a sip from her straw. “Yes,” she
exclaimed, “Nice and cold! Kamalani!”
Kanashelly continued, taking a long sip from
her coconut. “The Alpha Centaurans emphasized. that
the Kanatara culture, a culture of purpose and destiny,
will be the glue that will have us all stick together. As
we leave our island paradise and go out into the world,
the Alpha Centaurans said, ‘…earth’s first web country
will be a country on the web, made up of Kanatarans
who can be in contact with Kanatarans locally and all
over the world via the Internet. The web is the way that
Kanatarans stay in touch with each other. Move to Kanara. It’s free. Become a citizen of …earth’s first web
country.’
*
koho … aloha
Kamalani! … Thank you!
255
Kanatara—The Story
2009
“They said, ‘Kanatara is a country with embassies, consulates, and a flag. Kanatara’s color will be orange, radiating warmth and happiness, combining red’s
physical energy with yellow’s cheerfulness. Kanatara’s
orange is the color of social communication, adventure,
and enthusiasm for life. Its flag will be orange, yellow
and red.’ They said, ‘One day we may even have passports.’
“They said that Kanatara will go to all the countries of the world. Each country will have its own embassy, and every town or city will want its own consulate. They said we will have Kanatara conferences all
over the world, not only to meet great people, but also
to have classes and workshops on how to have a better
local Kanatara—and how to maximize the beneficent
influence of Kanatara throughout the world.
“Kanatara’s mission will also be to help others—drilling wells in Africa, building hospitals
throughout the developing world, creating and building
nanomachines, doing deep, deep research into longevity, investing in inventors and inventions that will make
the world a better place and the planet a healthier, happier planet.
“The Alpha Centaurans said that Kanatara will
bring peace to individuals through thoughts becoming
things, dreams becoming the themes of their lives, and
knowing that they can be anything they want, they can
do anything they want, they can have anything they
want, as long as it is good. A man is not likely to attack
his neighbor and take what he has if he knows that he
himself can have anything he wants, as long as his values line up with the values of the universe.
256
The Exploding Kanatara Culture
“You can imagine all this into existence, you
can speak all this into existence, you can act all this into
existence, as long as you makupoh (tune in) to the hakalo (the channel) and live by pakaloh-a (proper principles) and kachapoh-a (correct action). With every
breath that you take, with every step that you make,
with every thought that you think, move toward your
purpose in life and your destiny. Wonderfully, if you
don’t tune into the hakalo, it may tune into you!
“They said, ‘Live the life of your deepest
dreams, because your deepest dreams come from the
Great Spirit. Your deepest dreams are telling you your
purpose in life and are directing you toward your destiny.’
“What do you think of all that?”
The crowd cried out in agreement. “Tah!* Tah!
Hagah-o pono! Kanatara kaponoh!”
Kanadave took the mike again and announced,
“Let’s take a break for about thirty minutes. When we
come back, we’ll talk about your Persona Life Blueprint.”
The voyagers finished their coconuts and left
the front of the crowd, taking a break and letting the
crowd take a break as well.
*
Tah! … Yes!
Hagah-o pono! … Our destiny!
Kanatara kaponoh! … Kanatara moves!
257
Kanatara—The Story
258
2009
32. THE PEOPLECATALOG
When they came back after the break, Jepe took
the mike and continued. “There are a few more subjects
to cover today.” He smiled at Kanashelly at his side.
“Now we can speak to what Kanadoug was talking
about earlier—the kanatara.com web site. The Alpha
Centaurans said Kanatara is to have a PeopleCatalog
and to make it easy for people to make their own PeoplePages.
“You remember the importance of chanas, those
wonderful gifts that the Great Spirit distributes to everyone. They would be those things that Koteri listed for
us, remember? Things, he said, like your dreams, talents, imagination, genius, resources, experience, aspirations, proficiency, knowledge, wisdom, skills, vision,
adventures, moxie, intelligence, energy, creativity, information, personality, opportunities, potentialities, excitement, intuition, leadership, passion, capabilities, understanding, insight, interests, abilities, brilliance, ideas,
explorations. . . .
“Your combination of chanas is unique to you.
Altogether, these chanas, along with your purpose in
life and your destiny, comprise your Persona Life Blueprint, your embedded life code, the architectural layout
of your life. Basically, your architectural blueprint is
your jigsaw puzzle piece in the grand drama of earth’s
history. Like every snowflake, everybody’s Persona
259
Kanatara—The Story
2009
Life Blueprint is unique and individual. You express
your Persona Life Blueprint in the PeopleCatalog on
your individual PeoplePages. The Persona Life Blueprint of everyone on the planet comprises the Humanity
Genome, which is the complete puzzle, with all the
pieces, and when all the pieces are in place, then humankind has its ticket to depart the chrysalis.
“PeoplePages are where you express your Persona Life Blueprint and tell all about yourself and your
chanas, your purpose in life, your life’s deepest dreams,
and your destiny, as best you know it. Right there for
everyone to see. Infinite possibilities begin on your
PeoplePage. Somewhere in the world are people that
can help you attain your aspirations, perhaps with much
less effort than you imagine. The PeopleCatalog is
where they find you—or you find them.”
Kanashelly began waving her arms up and down
like DiggerLady. “A PeopleCatalog for the whole planet!” She left her mike and went out into the crowd,
shouting. “A PeopleCatalog for the whole planet!”
A young woman came to the front with an armful of balloons and handed them to Kanamarion. She
took the balloons. “Thank you, my dear. You are very
sweet!” She handed some of the balloons to
Kanashelly.
Jepe continued with a big smile on his face as he
saw the faces in the crowd smiling at his wife, waving
her arms and shouting. “Well, we can all get pretty excited about this. The PeopleCatalog is a vehicle to coordinate the dreams, talents, imagination, genius, brilliance, experience, and resources of everyone on the
whole planet. The hearts and souls of men and women
everywhere dream of using their hidden talents and
260
The PeopleCatalog
their imagination. There is potential greatness locked up
inside all of them.
“Through the PeopleCatalog, Kanatara will help
you draw into your life the people and circumstances
that you need to make your dreams come true. Through
the Kanatara web site, you can attract to yourself the
ideas, opportunities, and people to accomplish your
great purpose, to fulfill your great destiny.”
The people stood to applaud. They roared in
agreement, “Tah!* Tah! Pono nanah-o Chana! Kanatara kaponoh! Hagah-o pono!”
The crowd became more excited. “Tah! Tah!
Pono nanah-o Chana! Kanatara kaponoh! Hagah-o
pono!”
Kanashelly came back to the front from her foray into the crowd. She was still shouting, “A PeopleCatalog for the whole planet!” She raised her arms
out toward the crowd. “I thought you would like that!”
Once again, the crowd agreed. “Tah! Tah!”
*
Tah! … Yes!
Pono nanah-o Chana! … We are the Chana people!
Kanatara kaponoh! … Kanatara moves!
Hagah-o pono! … Our destiny!
261
Kanatara—The Story
262
2009
33. LUMINOUS WEALTH DEVELOPMENT
“Whoa, Kanashelly!” Jepe was laughing almost
uncontrollably. “I know you’re excited, but let’s hold
up a bit. Those details are pretty engaging, all right, and
they’re very important, too. But I’d like to back up a
minute and lay a little groundwork. In addition to being
…earth’s first web country, with a PeopleCatalog, the
web site needs to be a vehicle to help each individual
become economically independent, lamoni in Chana..
“The first step toward being able to move from
coyote to advanced being is for each person to be economically independent. You are not a free being until
you are economically free. This is a principle of the free
universe, and you can see it in the animal kingdom.
Most animals are economically independent. The bird
knows how to pick the worm out of the ground. That is
an instinctual talent, a chana, that the bird has. He uses
that talent to get the worm out of the ground so he can
eat it. He is economically independent.
“Now, here on Kanatara we don’t use or need
money. We are at an advanced stage, cooperating to
grow food, build buildings, design, and invent. We are
a technologically advanced and ecologically brilliant
paradise, although we can take very little credit for this
ourselves. But the rest of the world has not reached this
stage. For them, economic independence is the first step
toward being able to fulfill one’s purpose in life. Some
263
Kanatara—The Story
2009
have already reached this step, but most have not. Before we can leave the chrysalis, economic prosperity
needs to work for 100% of humanity. Your destiny includes your economic independence.
“The Alpha Centaurans said the Designer has
distributed chanas to everyone so each person can be
economically independent. You know that chanas are
all those characteristics that you were born with or have
developed during your life.”
Jepe continued. “Now, everyone has these
chanas. Next, they need to be monetized. Monetized
means turning them into money. As you know, the
Kanatara web site will list everyone’s chanas on PeoplePages so everybody in the world can see them. Well,
not everybody in the world, of course—not yet—but
that day is coming. Monetizing these chanas moves one
closer to economic independence. But in our world up
to now, most people have had only limited opportunities to monetize their chanas because people have been
relatively isolated in their small communities. Even a
large city is a small community when compared with
the world. But if these chanas can be monetized
throughout the whole world via the Internet, instead of
thousands of economic opportunities, there are millions
of economic opportunities.”
Taking another sip from his coconut, he continued. “Kanatara can become an economic machine, an
engine of wealth creation. By sharing genius and imagination with others, people can create wealth where it
did not exist before, magnifying their personal economics and moving closer to economic independence. Every person who moves to Kanatara is a world of expertise and experience—a wealth of ideas and abilities.”
264
Luminous Wealth Development
Kanajulia took her mike and continued. “Tapping into the infinite wealth of talent, energy, and insight, millions of budding wealth producers across the
planet will create economic independence for themselves and others. Vast wealth and influence can grow
out of a single idea when mixed with imagination.
Kanatara will connect people in such a way that wealth
is created throughout the planet.”
Kanajulia took another sip from her coconut and
went on excitedly. “Kalilani!* Kalilani! Luminous
wealth development for all the people in our world!”
She started waving her arms up and down like DiggerLady. “This is a great giant when mixed with the genius
and resources of others! Sharing your chanas on your
PeoplePages can help maximize the economic development of the planet!” In her excitement, she left the
mike and walked out into the crowd, like Kanashelly,
waving her arms, and exclaiming, “Wealth development for the whole planet! The whole planet!”
With a big smile on his, face, Kanadave looked
at Kanajulia as she walked away. He laughed, “You
know, it is really exciting. . . .”
*
Kalilani! … Hurrah!
265
Kanatara—The Story
266
2009
34. KANAVERSITY
Kanadave took a mike again. “We have mentioned two of the four things the Alpha Centaurans said
the web site should do: launch …earth’s first web country with its PeopleCatalog, and then create luminous
wealth development using your PeoplePages. Now let’s
talk about the third thing the Kanatara web site will
do—launch Kanaversity as the world’s next step in education.
“Kanaversity is a way for many people to reach
lamoni, economic independence. People can share their
chanas, the genius they have within them, and be recompensed in return They can reach their local community and the world with their talents, expertise, skills,
knowledge, and wisdom that are valuable to others willing to pay for this value. Humankind needs to be able to
partake of what others have inside them. People will
teach what others want to learn. People want to learn a
lot of things. Kanatarans will be teachers and learners.
“Kanaversity will be an almost unlimited panoply of educational and social life experiences and adventures—an educational and social extravaganza of
Classes and Groups. It will be an educational and social
enterprise, exploding across the cultural and social
landscape—a platform for people to monetize the
wealth that is inside them in a free-form educational
and social milieu. Kanaversity creates wealth from people’s brilliance, genius, experience, knowledge, wis267
Kanatara—The Story
2009
dom, and interests—packaging this wealth in a form
that others can enjoy and be enriched.
“Teach what you know. Learn what you want to
know. Teach whatever you want, wherever you want,
whenever you want, and charge whatever you want.
Kanatara will handle the administration through the
web site, leaving the teacher free to teach. Classes are
not for credit—they are solely for you to learn what you
want to know.
“By teaching what you know, the world will
become richer. Some classes will be taught live locally.
Others will be taught over the Internet.
“Kanatara will attract some of the world’s
greatest experts and most talented individuals who will
appreciate the opportunity to teach and share what they
know in an unstructured, unfettered environment. By
learning useful skills and increasing your talents, you
will move toward lamoni as you learn to use these skills
and talents to increase your income. As your knowledge
and wisdom increase, your world also becomes richer
in non-material ways.
“Learning is exciting when you are learning
what you want to know. The world is filled with millions of things to learn. Kanatara will be like a library
full of tomes, each of which you can open and explore.
“Kanaversity will be the most wonderful educational enterprise the world has ever known. It will unlock the talents, wisdom, knowledge, and skills that are
hidden inside everyone. The genius inside of you can be
opened up so that everyone has access to it.
“Without bureaucracy to stand in the way, your
mind, your genius, will be available to others. There are
millions of subjects that can be taught by those who are
268
Kanaversity
expert in those subjects. There will be classes in every
subject under the sun.
“You’ll not only learn from each other, but also
learn from the give and take with other students in the
class. Completely free-form as to time, duration, location, and methodology, it is a way for top experts in a
field to relate to the most ordinary people.
“Teach local or teach half-way around the
world. Learn locally, or learn from someone half-way
around the world. Everything is being restructured by
technology, the Internet, and ease of travel. Education
will be completely restructured as well.
“In addition to teaching Classes, you can also
increase your income by leading Groups in activities
others will enjoy—adding a social aspect to Kanatara.
Lead an activity in whatever you love to do. Lead a
Group in whatever you want, whenever you want,
wherever you want, and charge whatever you want. It’s
always more fun to do things with other people. With a
myriad of Groups to choose from, no one will ever lack
for social opportunities. Again, Kanatara through its
web site will handle the administration.
“We are social animals. Classes and Groups will
help us regain our social balance. We used to sit outside
on the front porch swing and talk to each other. Then
television came along, and we went inside and sat
around together and watched instead of talking, At that
point, we became less social. Then the Internet came
along, and we left even the camaraderie of sitting
around and watching something together. We went off
alone in front of our computers and became even less
social.
269
Kanatara—The Story
2009
“Social media was an attempt to restore sociability, but we found ourselves relating to people as digits on a screen. The warmth of shaking a person’s hand
or giving a warm hug became impossible. Classes and
Groups bring back the social aspect of our lives. Kanatara is a step beyond social media. Kanatara is the true
‘social medium.’
“Kanatara will contribute to solving the planet
puzzle of poverty. It will do this through luminous
wealth development using the PeopleCatalog and
through Kanaversity.”
270
35. SOLVING THE PLANET PUZZLES—
THE CONUNDRA
Now Jepe came to the front and took a mike.
“The fourth thing Kanatara is to do with its web site is
to be a catalyst for solving the planet puzzles. There are
two sides to this coin. One side is becoming lamoni,
economically independent, and the other side is pursuing your haga, your purpose, and achieving your hagah-o, your destiny, in life. If everybody does this, we
will solve the planet puzzles, the huminumi punupunumah in Chana. Then we can move into the coming age.
You recall that the planet puzzles, or conundra, are war,
poverty, disease, and ignorance, in no particular order.
If we allow the Great Spirit to guide us as it guides the
stars and guided the Chana people, we will know what
to do to solve the conundra. If each of us pursues our
purpose toward achieving our destiny, it is inevitable
that we will be doing our part in earth’s great jigsaw
puzzle.
“In helping solve the planet puzzles, it is certain
that your purpose and destiny will be tied with other
people, possibly people on the other side of the world.
Where will you find them? You may find them on their
PeoplePages in the PeopleCatalog. Or they may find
you on your PeoplePage. Sometimes these other people
will help you discover your purpose and destiny. And
you may help them discover theirs. It is in working to271
Kanatara—The Story
2009
gether that we work out our purpose and destiny and
also the destiny of humankind.
“The planet puzzles can be solved when people
understand their destiny and when they put their chanas
to work. Let’s talk about the planet puzzle of poverty
for a moment. Perhaps the greatest gift one can give to
the poor is to teach them that they have a purpose in life
and a destiny to achieve. He or she is not just a rag
picker, but a person with chanas, a person with a Persona Life Blueprint, a person with a unique and individual destiny.”
Kanashelly asked for a mike. “It could be the
destiny of the rag picker to have a solution to poverty—
not by himself, of course, but he can be one of the jigsaw puzzle pieces. The rag picker has a mind that can
be just as tuned in to the Great Spirit and the universe
as yours or mine. It may be the rich woman in her castle
that has the answer to poverty, or maybe that answer
will come from someone in the slums of Kinshasa. Or
maybe a combination of the chanas of the two of them
together!
“And before I forget, the Alpha Centaurans said
we should establish a humanitarian trust to utilize in
solving the planet puzzles—especially where money
can be helpful. We decided to call it Hakanami, meaning well, a well of water, in Chana. It will be a deep
well from which we can draw monetary resources to
help solve the planet puzzles.
A man ran forward with his hand in the air to
ask a question. He ran to a mike and was out of breath.
“Please, my persona is Candleman, and I work with the
Monorail. What if someone in the slums of Mumbai
asks us this question, What do we answer him? I really
272
Solving the Planet Puzzles—The Conundra
need to know. My purpose in life may hang in the balance.”
Kanashelly responded, “Yes, my good man,
what is the question?”
“Oh, I’m sorry,” Candleman responded, still out
of breath. “His question would be, ‘Why do you have
all this luxury? Look at the luxury in the Grand Kahali
Hotel. Look at the luxury in the Andromeda cruise
ships, the condos on Kahali Beach, the ski resort at
Kamakala. Is this the example you want to set while
working on the planet puzzle of poverty?’”
Kanashelly spoke softly into her microphone. “I
understand Candleman. I understand the question, and
it is a good one. The answer is that all of this has been
accomplished by volunteer work, and if all the world
worked together, we could all have this luxury. It’s not
that there’s something wrong with luxury. The problem
comes when one brother or sister lives in a castle and
another one lives under a bridge. How do we help make
the planet work economically for 100% of humanity?
How can each individual be economically independent?
How can humankind monetize its chanas so that no one
is sleeping under a bridge?”
“Oh, thank you, ma’am. Thank you so much. I
feel so much better. Thank you.”
An elderly woman with white hair and a slight
limp made her way around the crowd and to the front.
She gave Jepe a young coconut with a straw. “It’s plenty cold,” she said as she turned and walked away.
“Thank you, my sweet woman. May your ha*
gah-o take you to wonderful adventures.”
*
hagah-o … destiny
273
Kanatara—The Story
2009
She turned to him and said with a big smile,
“Jepe, this is the greatest adventure of my life. I know I
have found my destiny.”
Taking a sip from his coconut, Jepe continued
the discourse. “Let’s talk about the planet puzzle of disease for a moment. Just as every cell in your body
needs to be healthy, so does every person on the earth
need to be healthy. It is not beyond the realm of possibility that a leper in Kolkata has the cure for leprosy in
the depths of his mind. His destiny, his mind, his talents
and abilities at this moment are totally, it would seem,
unused, unreachable. So the planet puzzle is unsolvable,
because his jigsaw puzzle piece is not available for the
completed puzzle. But it can be . . . and it will be.
“Or maybe it will be a nurse in the slums of
Tondo in Manila that has the answer, or a technology
person at the Harvard Medical School. In the end, the
answer will be a combination of all these and more.
There are 7+ billion geniuses on planet earth, and these
brilliant minds can be utilized to solve the conundra.
But many, if not most, of these brilliant minds are now
going to waste. They have no hope because they see no
purpose, except to survive the day. They see no destiny
to achieve.
“What about the conundrum of war? It could be
a gang member in the favelas of Rio de Janeiro, or perhaps a child soldier in the middle of Africa, that has a
partial answer to this planet puzzle. Perhaps, one of
these will show us, in combination with others of
course, because each is only one piece of the jigsaw
puzzle. Perhaps, they will get together and show us we
no longer need to be cavemen in a jungle, beating away
enemies that lie over the next mountain. Instead of be-
274
Solving the Planet Puzzles—The Conundra
ing chanabirds—lovebirds—calling to each other, we
consider them our enemies because they don’t look
quite like us—their eyes are different, or something else
is different, their color is different. They dress differently. But we are all humankind, regardless of the color of
our skin or the way our eyes are shaped, or the way we
dress. Perhaps it will be a black friend in Dar es Salaam
that shows us this, or a stock broker in Hong Kong.
“The answer to ignorance may come from our
friends in Cambridge, or it could come from a
sheepherder in the highlands of Bolivia or a fisherman
off Cameroon. Ignorance is a funny thing. It is not limited to the poor. Our prejudices don’t seem like ignorance to us. The coyote is not ignorant, but if as advanced beings we act like coyotes, then that is ignorance. Uneducated people can be very wise. There are
undoubtedly country folk in the highlands of Tibet with
less ignorance than some who work in tall buildings in
great capitals of the world.
“So we will move from poverty to wealth, disease to health, war to peace, and from ignorance to
knowledge, wisdom, and enlightenment.
“We’re going to take a break for about thirty
minutes. Don’t go away. We’ll be back.”
One man in a bright yellow shirt came running
to the podium with a big yellow balloon on a string. He
handed it to Jepe and asked for the mike. “When we go
to the world, we could have . . . watering stations . . . or
oases . . . wells of clear water . . . in all the countries to
pursue the development of Kanatara’s destiny, its hagah-o.”
275
Kanatara—The Story
2009
Once again, the crowd agreed. “Tah!* Tah!”
Jepe took the mike, holding the big yellow balloon. “It seems like this is just the start of a million
myriad of ideas that Kanatarans will have as we move
forward together.”
The crowd showed its enthusiasm, shouting,
“Kanatara kaponoh! Kanatara kalih-o!”
Jepe handed the yellow balloon to a bystander
and before he could continue, someone in the crowd
handed him a coconut. “I’m sure getting a lot of coconuts! Well, there weren’t any on Centuron, so they are
most welcome!” Taking the coconut, he continued.
“Kanamarion has been tugging at me. She wants to say
a few things.”
Kanamarion took a mike and began. “The perfection of the planet and the metamorphosis of humankind is designed just as perfectly as how a butterfly
comes out of its chrysalis. If you study this as entomologists do, the perfection of the Design is absolutely
astounding.
“It’s the same way when it comes to our planet
and humankind. It is all designed perfectly. Our transformation from coyote to advanced being, our departure
from the chrysalis and coming out into the golden
age—all of this is absolutely and perfectly Designed.
Do not think that because we have free will we can interrupt the Design and mess things up. Yes, we can for
a while, but the Design is there. Just like in childbirth, it
may be messy, but it’s designed perfectly, and the baby
comes out perfect. The Design is perfect.”
*
Tah! … Yes!
Kanatara kaponoh! … Kanatara moves!
Kanatara kalih-o! … Kanatara forever!
276
Solving the Planet Puzzles—The Conundra
Once again, the crowd agreed. “Tah! Tah!”
“Do you have any questions?”
A skinny youngster raised her hand, and a mike
was brought to her. “Yes, my persona is Bubble, and I
work with the Monorail as a part of the scheduling
crew. So if you would like to change anything in the
Monorail schedule, I’m the one to see.
“My question has to do with the beings on Centuron. I would like to know if you asked them about
why they look the way they do, I mean transparent and
everything. Also, how long do they live? Thank you.”
She handed the mike back.
“Very good questions. Actually we did ask them
these questions. They said they had advanced beyond
the physical in many respects. Alpha Centaurans do retain some physical aspects, but relatively few compared
to earthlings, which are still very physical.
“As to their age and how long they live, they
said they live as long as they want. As long as they live
by the values of the universe, they continue living. If
they lose the desire to live in alignment with the universe, they no longer live. They sort of disappear.
“Coming back from Alpha Centauri, we have a
personal message to you from our friends on Centuron.
This is their message to all of us. They asked us to give
it to you. ‘Let the Great Spirit guide you as it guided the
Chana people.’”
“Pono nanah-o Chana!*”
*
Pono nanah-o Chana! … We are the Chana People!
277
Kanatara—The Story
278
2009
36. DIGGERLADY WAVES HER ARMS AGAIN
Kanamarion stepped back from the podium.
“You can have it again, Jepe. Thank you.”
“Thank you, Kanamarion.” Jepe had a huge
smile on his face as he continued. “I’m saving one last
thing that we learned at Alpha Centauri. I think you all
should be sitting down.”
The people had looks of puzzlement on their
faces. “What could this be?”
“And for this,” Jepe continued, “I’m going to
ask DiggerLady to come up here. She will make the
announcement. The reason we saved this for the last is
because it will probably end the equinox celebration.
This celebration will probably fall apart just like the
one that fell apart in June of 2006. DiggerLady, it’s all
yours.”
The crowd was all abuzz. “What could this possibly be?”
“Thank you, Jepe,” DiggerLady began. “Hi,
everybody!”
“Chalah!*” the crowd answered back.
“First of all, I didn’t get this first hand, of
course, because I didn’t go to Alpha Centauri. Kanadave and Jepe told me the story, and they wanted me to
*
Chalah! … Hello!
279
Kanatara—The Story
2009
tell you because I have told you so much about the
Chana people.”
DiggerLady started waving her arms up and
down, and asked in a loud voice. “Are you ready for
this?”
The crowd cheered in return, “Tah!* Tah!”
“Are you sure?” DiggerLady responded in her
customary way when she had something exciting to tell.
“Tah! Tah! Kumi-umi! Kumi-umi!”
“Okay, here goes! You remember the great
boats the Chana people sailed off in, never to return?”
“Tah! Tah!” The people remembered.
“Well those great boats, that took fifty years to
build, were . . . are you sure you’re ready?”
“Tah! Tah!” everyone exclaimed! “Kumi-umi!
Kumi-umi!”
“Those great boats were not meant to sail . . .
the ocean.
“They were meant . . . to sail . . . the universe.
“They . . . were . . . ,” she paused, waving her
arms up and down, laughing and dancing around.
“. . . space ships!
“They sailed away in . . . ”
Before she could finish, the crowd fell into an
uncontrollable convulsion of joy and excitement. As
expected, the people burst into dancing and song. They
beat drums. They blew horns. They shouted and sang,
*
Tah! … Yes
Kumi-umi! … Please!
280
DiggerLady Waves Her Arms Again
“Pono nanah-o Chana!* Pono nanah-o Chana! Pono
nanah-o Chana!”
They chanted, “Kanatara kaponoh! Kanatara
kaponoh!” and “Kanatara kalih-o!” DiggerLady disappeared into the crowd.
About twenty balloons with their gondolas underneath them threw orchids, hibiscuses, and gardenias
down to the crowd. Then all the balloons began descending, and as each one reached the ground, the occupants climbed out of the gondolas to join the crowd.
People were hugging each other as they danced. Tears
ran down their faces.
Kanadave took the mike again and bellowed into the uproar. “Once the Chana people had sailed off
into space . . . the island also sailed off into another dimension . . . waiting for the day when some people . . .
whose destiny it was . . . when the time had come . . . to
begin the crossover . . . when the day arrived . . . for
humankind to begin coming out of its chrysalis . . . ”
His voice was getting hoarse, but he continued
shouting into the microphone. “. . . then the island
would come back . . . still in another dimension . . .
awaiting its destiny.
“Basically, when the Chana people left . . . the
island left, too. But Koteri said the Chana people . . .
may come back someday. . . .”
It was hopeless to be heard over the cacophony
of the crowd. “We’re going to dismiss you now!” he
squalled into his microphone, but the people were already dismissed into a larger celebration. “We have
*
Pono nanah-o Chana! … We are the Chana people!
Kanatara kaponoh! … Kanatara moves!
Kanatara kalih-o! … Kanatara forever!
281
Kanatara—The Story
2009
more to celebrate now than ever before.” But nobody
heard him. “Chalah!* See you at the shama pohomuhama. Chalah! Chalah! Have a Chana day! Mahano
Chana!” Kanadave joined the dancing, hugging, singing, and chanting, and disappeared into the crowd.
*
Chalah! … Good-bye!
shama poho-muhama … solstice celebration
Mahano Chana! … Have a Chana day!
282
37. GRAND OPENING OF THE GRAND KAHALI
HOTEL
“Kanatara is for all the people of the world. Kanatara
is a place where you can live the life you always wanted
to live.”
For the June solstice celebration, there was a
change in the usual meeting place. The venue for the
celebration was the Grand Kahali Hotel in Port Kahali.
It was finally finished, although new towers would be
built in the future as the need arose. If needed for future
newcomers, the towers could be as high as 100 stories
with 100 suites on each level. All newcomers could stay
in the hotel for just as long as they wished. It wasn’t
really a hotel, in the usual sense. It was just a great
place to live.
The Grand Kahali Hotel was huge. Everything
was on a grand scale. The reception area was huge. The
grand ballroom was huge, with a giant chandelier hanging from its 60-foot (18 m) ceiling. There were four
other ballrooms nearly as large. There were six restaurants, six bars, and three places to dance. Naturally, the
entire Grand Kahali was set up for wi-fi. There were
thirty meeting rooms and another thirty large conference rooms, some of them quite large. The residences
were spacious apartment-sized suites with several bed-
283
Kanatara—The Story
2009
rooms. The color of the interior walls could be controlled by the resident and changed at will.
The outside of the Grand Kahali was splendiferous. The Neutramica walls were in various shapes and
colors. At night they glowed in the dark. Working in the
hotel had become a popular volunteer vocation, and
there was always plenty of help and service. Whatever
you wanted in your suite could be ordered, and it would
be delivered speedily. The food production people were
especially proud of their menus for suite service, and
the restaurants had international menus that would satisfy anyone’s palate.
Outside the hotel, there were golf courses, tennis courts, shuffleboard courts, croquet courses, swimming pools, and bumper cars just for starters. Because
the hotel was near the beach, all water sports were
available. Hydrogen-e jet skis were available, and hydrogen-e powerboats pulled water skiers and parasailers. Others enjoyed surfing, kayaking and windsurfing.
There were now hiking and bicycle paths to the
Chana Desert and its nearby ruins at Kanatana. There
were also hiking and bicycle trails going down to Kahali Beach, or one could take the Monorail. There were
other hiking and bicycle trails up to Kamakala Hot
Springs, or one could go by Mini-Mono.
The Grand Opening was attended by over 8,000
people. Those who could not get into the main ballroom
could watch by huge video screens from the other four
ballrooms. The food production people circulated
throughout the crowds with hors d’oeuvres and champagne from the Kanatara vineyards.
Jepe mounted the podium in the grand ballroom.
He waited for the crowd to settle down and be quiet.
284
Grand Opening of the Grand Kahali Hotel
“When we came here nine years ago, there was nothing
here but the chanabirds and hooligahs. That, of course,
is an exaggeration, because there were millions of butterflies and millions of fireflies . . . and lots, lots more.
“But if someone could have stepped into the future and taken a photo of this place today and brought it
back to us, we could never, of course, have believed it.
It’s still hard to believe. But it shows what can happen
when people work together in makoh-a, harmony, with
a common goal.”
Jepe put on a big smile. “It also helps if you are
in another dimension.”
The audience jubilated, “Tah!* Tah! Pono
nanah-o Chana!”
Jepe continued, opening his arms and moving
them around in a circle. “What do you think of all
this?”
“Kanatara kaponoh!” the crowd exclaimed in
agreement. “Hagah-o pono!”
“Where in the world could you live in a place
like this for free? . . .” Jepe continued, “. . . and have all
this delicious food for free?”
The audience exclaimed again, “Tah! Tah! Pono
nanah-o Chana!”
“Does this not show what could happen on
planet earth if everyone had the same makoh-a and ma-
*
Tah! … Yes
Pono nanah-o Chana! … We are the Chana people!
Kanatara kaponoh! … Kanatara moves!
Hagah-o pono! … Our destiny!
makoh-a … harmony
makuh-a … peace
285
Kanatara—The Story
2009
kuh-a that we have? This same desire to fulfill pono
hagah* and achieve pono hagah-o?”
“Tah! Tah!”
“If Kanatara can fulfill its purpose and destiny
for planet earth, then that can happen.”
“Tah! Tah!”
“And by navigating through the black holes of
war, disease, ignorance, and poverty, these scourges
can be a thing of the past.”
“Tah! Tah!”
“Everybody’s chanas in the whole wide world,
if they are available to be placed into the giant jigsaw
puzzle, can move us toward the next stage in humankind’s development. Each person’s imagination is
unique—unlike any other imagination—as different as
two sunrises or two sunsets.”
The audience cheered enthusiastically, “Tah!
Tah! Pono nanah-o Chana!”
“Everyone who comes to Kanatara can stay in
this beautiful Grand Kahali Hotel for as long as desired.
If people want to move to other places on the island,
they are free to do so.”
“Tah! Tah!”
Kanadave took the mike. “I have something I’d
like to say. I know that most of you have already signed
up on the Internet and have listed your chanas on your
PeoplePages. At least some of your chanas. Some of
you have told me that as you started listing them, you
thought of more, and then some more. You have written
about your purpose in life, your deepest dreams, and
your destiny. Some of you have already had people
*
pono hagah … our purpose
pono hagah-o … our destiny
286
Grand Opening of the Grand Kahali Hotel
contact you, and the synergism is already beginning.
You can always edit and improve your PeoplePages.
Keep up the good work, ono huno-mah.*”
Jepe asked the crowd, “Can everyone get a glass
of champagne in your hand? We’re going to toast.”
The waiters and waitresses were the food people, busy bringing in more champagne so everyone
could toast. After a while, the food people raised their
hands to indicate that everyone was ready.
Kanashelly mounted the podium and took a
champagne glass and raised it. She had a huge smile on
her face. “With this champagne glass, I toast and dedicate this Grand Kahali Hotel and the future of Kanatara.”
Everyone raised a champagne glass and joined
in the toast.
An elderly white-haired gentleman came slowly
to the podium and mounted it, carrying a glass of
champagne. He took the mike.
In a slow, gravelly voice, he began to speak into
the microphone. “I was one of the scientists who came
in the first sailing vessel returning to the island from
San Diego. . . . That was in the year 2000. . . . A lot of
you don’t know how it was when you had to come
through the Barrier Storms in a sailing vessel that . . .
wasn’t much bigger than your thumb.”
Everybody laughed.
The gentleman slowly continued. “We didn’t
know what we were getting into. . . . We didn’t know
we had another dimension going here. . . . We didn’t
know anything about where all this would lead us.”
*
ono huno-mah … my friends
287
Kanatara—The Story
2009
He raised his glass high.
“I want to toast to that night up the coast from
Malibu when Kanadave and Kanadoug and their wives
. . . looked at the Internet and looked at the maps . . .
and decided to come and see this island. . . . Something
very special, something cosmic that we still only dimly
understand . . . was going on that night. Kanadave,
Kanadoug had no idea what was really happening. . . .
Even their wives with their sixth sense didn’t know . . .
but they wanted to visit the island. When I came here in
2000 . . . I had no idea what I was venturing into. . . .
We still don’t understand it, but I think the Great Spirit
of the Chana people had a plan—a plan for some people
. . . who would come to this island . . . and be the harbingers of the coming age. . . . They would be a catalyst
for change in earth’s culture . . . bringing humankind
out of its chrysalis . . . and into a golden era.
“Will you toast with me to that?”
The audience rose in a cheer. “Tah! Tah! Pono
nanah-o Chana!” They began stamping their feet in a
deafening thunder.
“Kanatara kaponoh!” The crowd continued to
cheer. “Hagah-o pono! Kanatara kalih-o!*”
Then the crowd settled down and felt the importance of it all. They began to sway back and forth,
chanting, “Puma, puma, puma.”
An eighty-piece band of joyful musicians began
to play. The people began singing, swaying, and danc*
Kanatara kalih-o! … Kanatara forever!
puma … heavy
288
Grand Opening of the Grand Kahali Hotel
ing slowly. “Takanoh Uh-a-Muh-a Pohoh tani-mah.*”
Then, “Kanatara kapono alu tali ah umuh-oh.” They
were tuned in to the channel, and they knew it.
*
Takanoh Uh-a-Muh-a Pohoh tani-mah. … The Great Spirit guides the
stars.
Kanatara kapono alu tali ah umuh-o … Kanatara is movement toward
light and growth.
289
Kanatara—The Story
290
2009
THE GRAND ADVENTURE
TOWARD YOUR DESTINY
We are all unique. Humankind cannot reach its
destiny until all the pieces are put in their proper places
within the grand scheme. It will take all of us to complete the jigsaw puzzle—no one can be left out. We are
all moving together. We are moving as a family out of
the chrysalis and into our butterfly future—innocent
honest, pure, gentle—aligned with the universe. At Alpha Centauri, in the Milky Way, out in the Andromeda
galaxy, they wait for us to come out and be among
them.
Over the next 50 to 100 years, Kanatara will be
powered by the love and laughter of millions of people
from all over the earth. They will add their imagination
to the mix—a gathering of people on the Journey. Together we will be a nourishing wind gently blowing
over the earth.
When you sign up and move to Kanatara, you
embark on a luminous voyage, the greatest adventure of
your life. There has never been a place like Kanatara,
anywhere on this planet, any time in history. Although
it doesn’t cost anything to move to Kanatara, you
should be prepared to leave behind the baggage of your
past and start a new life. Most people will never go
back to where they were before. So when you say goodbye to those who don’t accompany you, it really will
be, Good-bye.
291
292
Come with Kanatara.
Move to Kanatara.
Join the new culture of Kanatara.
www.kanatara.com
May the Great Spirit, the Infinite One, guide us
as it guides the stars and guided the ancient Chana people. See its messages in the clouds. Listen in a seashell.
Tune in to the channel in your quiet contemplation.
Live the life of your deepest dreams.
Be like chanabirds calling to each other, lovebirds calling to our brothers and sisters all over the
earth. We are lovebirds calling to each other as we voyage from one age to another.
The Journey awaits you.
Malika ana lanakuh.
293
294
295
296
APPENDIX
English Glossary*
299
Chana Glossary*
309
Chana Calendar
319
Chana Numbers
321
pakaloh-a and kachapoh-a
323
Rules of the Universe
325
*
These glossaries will grow over time as new words are needed for conversation and other communication. This expanding glossary can be
found at www.kanatara.com/glossary.
297
Appendix
298
English Glossary
GLOSSARY
Spice up your day with a little Chana.
English Glossary
Glossary word, Chana word, pronunciation guide word
against … conchana (con-CHAH-nah)
agree (v) … tolu-ah (toh-loo-AH)
agreement … toluh-a (toh-LOO-ah)
and … ah (AH)
any … hanu (HAH-noo)
anyone … hanumi (hah-NOO-mee)
await (v) … lanakuh (LAH-nah-KOO)
awake, awakening … kana (KAH-nah)
awaken (v) … kanah (kah-NAH)
awesome … lani (LAH-nee)
beach … alani (ah-LAH-nee)
beautiful ... unami (oo-NAH-mee)
big … poho (POH-hoh)
bird … kumula (koo-MOO-lah)
boat … lakih-o (lah-KEE-oh)
bright ... ulumi (oo-LOO-mee)
brother … hani (HAH-nee)
brothers … hani-mah (HAH-nee-MAH)
cataracts, plant for seeing (see “seeing plant” in
glossary) … ushama (oo-SHAH-mah)
chanabird … kumula-chana
(koo-MOO-lah-CHAH-nah)
channel … hakalo (hah-KAH-loh)
channel (v) … hakaloh (HAH-kah-LOH)
ciao (Ital.) … chalah (chah-LAH)
299
Appendix
city … poho-hanako (POH-hoh-hah-NAH-koh)
cloud … hula (HOO-lah)
come (v) … pokih (poh-KEE)
complete (v) … tumunoh (TOO-moo-NOH)
completeness … tumuno (too-MOO-noh)
contemplate (v) … muhuluh (MOO-hoo-LOO)
contemplation … muhulu (moo-HOO-loo)
conundrum … punupunu (POO-noo-POO-noo)
correct conduct, correct action … kachapoh-a
(KAH-chah-POH-ah)
cosmic … hunih-o (hoo-NEE-oh)
council of elders … pah-o-lima (PAH-oh-LEE-mah)
dark … mako (MAH-koh)
dawn … matika (mah-TEE-kah)
day … mahano (mah-HAH-noh)
deceive (v) … hinachah (HEE-nah-CHAH)
deception … hinacha (hee-NAH-chah)
decrease, shrink (v) … umuh (oo-MOO)
decreasing, shrinking … umu (OO-moo)
deep … maholo (mah-HOH-loh)
deepest … maholo maholo
(mah-HOH-loh mah-HOH-loh)
defraud (commit fraud) (v) … hinachah
(HEE-nah-CHAH)
desire, want … pakalih-a (PAH-kah-LEE-ah)
desire, want (v) … pakali-ah (PAH-ka-lee-AH)
destiny … hagah-o (hah-GAH-oh)
disharmony … concho (CON-choh)
do (v) … komih (koh-MEE)
doing … komi (KOH-mee)
dream … kanamuni (KAH-nah-MOO-nee)
dream (v) … kanamunih (KAH-nah-moo-NEE)
earth (world) … huminumi (HOO-mee-NOO-mee)
300
English Glossary
economically independent … lamoni (lah-MOH-nee)
economically independent, to become (v) … lamonih
(LAH-moh-NEE)
equinox (decreasing, fall) … kalo-hapo-umu
(KAH-loh-HAH-poh-OO-moo)
equinox (growing, spring) … kalo-hapo-umuh-o
(KAH-loh -HAH-poh-oo-MOO oh)
fact … hunchana (hun-CHAH-nah)
favorable … hamino (hah-MEE-noh)
favorable moon … kilo-hamino
(KEE-loh-hah-MEE-noh)
festival … poho-muhama (POH-hoh-moo-HAH-mah)
figure out (v) … punanih (POO-nah-NEE)
forbidden … nacha-komi (NAH-chah-KOH-mee)
force … punihana (POO-nee-HAH-nah)
force (v) … punihanah (poo-nee-hah-NAH)
forever … kalih-o (kah-LEE-oh)
fraud … hinacha (hee-NAH-chah)
friend (feminine) … huno-ah (HOO-noh-AH)
friend (masculine) … huno-ih (HOO-noh-EE)
friend (masculine or feminine) … huno (HOO-noh)
friend (unspecified gender) … huno-uh (HOO-noh-OO)
from … palu (PAH-loo)
full moon … kilo-poho (KEE-loh-POH-hoh)
[future tense] … nuhuno (noo-HOO-noh)
glow … lanako (lah-NAH-koh)
glow, shine (v) … lanakoh (lah-nah-KOH)
go (v) … polah (poh-LAH)
going … pola (POH-lah)
good … kama (KAH-mah)
good [feeling good, feeling fine] … paki (PAH-kee)
good-bye (for a long time) ... kamu-oh (kah-moo-OH)
good-bye (for a short time) … kamuh-o (kah-MOO-oh)
301
Appendix
good-bye (see you soon) … chalah (chah-LAH),
kamuh-o (kah-MOO-oh)
good evening … chalah (chah-LAH)
good morning … chalah (chah-LAH)
great … poho (POH-hoh)
Great Spirit … Uh-a-Muh-a Pohoh
(OO-ah MOO-ah Poh-HOH)
grow, increase (v) … umu-oh (OO moo-OH)
growth, growing, increase, increasing …
umuh-o (oo-MOO-oh)
guide … takano (tah-KAH-noh)
guide (v) … takanoh (TAH-kah-NOH)
guidebook … takano-punani
(ta-KAH-noh-POO-nah-NEE)
happy, happiness … takuh-o (tah-KOO-oh)
harmony … makoh-a (mah-KOH-ah)
have, i.e., something I have … chico (CHEE-koh)
have, hold (v) … chicoh (chee-KOH)
he … unu-ih (OO-noo-EE)
head … puh-o (POO-oh)
hear (v) … hapuh (hah-POO)
heavy … puma (POO-mah)
hello … koho (KOH-hoh) or chalah (chah-LAH)
home … tahimi (tah-HEE-mee)
honesty … tahilo-palohi (tah-HEE-loh-pah-LOH-hee)
hooligah … (An insect, native to Kanatara, somewhat
similar to a cicada) (HOO-lee-GAH)
hooray … kalilani (KAH-lee-LAH-nee)
hot … pacho (PAH-choh)
hot springs … kala (KAH-lah)
how? … komi-poki (KOH-mee-POH-kee)
how? [feeling] … paki (PAH-kee)
how are you (singular)? … ana paki?
302
English Glossary
(AH-nah PAH-kee?)
how are you (plural)? … pana paki?
(PAH-nah PAH-kee?)
humankind … hunikana (HOO-nee-KAH-nah)
hurrah … kalilani (KAH-lee-LAH-nee)
husband … lanih-o (lah-NEE-oh)
I, me, my … ono (OH-noh)
increase, increasing, growth, growing …
umuh-o (oo-MOO-oh)
increase, grow (v) … umu-oh (oo-moo-OH)
independence, inner, see inner independence
inner, inside … koha (KOH-hah)
inner independence … kalamuna (KAH-lah-MOO-nah)
inner light … talikoha (TAH-lee-KOH-hah)
island … poh-a-koh-a (POH-ah-KOH-ah)
it … unu-uh (OO-noo-OO)
it doesn't matter ... nachana (nah-CHAH-nah)
journey … maliko (mah-LEE-koh)
journey (v) … malikoh (MAH-lee-KOH)
know (v) … hunchanah (hun-chah-NAH)
land … chapo (CHAH-poh)
life … komuni (koh-MOO-nee)
live (v) … komunih (KOH-moo-NEE)
light … tali (TAH-lee)
little … icha (EE-cha)
long … kuh-o (KOO-oh)
lots and lots … mana-mana (MAH-nah-MAH-nah)
love … kamoni (kah-MOH-nee)
love (v) … kamonih (kah-moh-NEE)
man ... huni (HOO-nee)
many … mana (MAH-nah)
matter, it doesn’t … nachana (nah-CHAH-nah)
me, my, I … ono (OH-noh)
303
Appendix
moon … kilo (KEE-loh)
more … pah (PAH)
most … pah-ah (pah-AH)
mountain … pumala (poo-MAH-lah)
move, movement … kapono (kah-POH-noh)
move (v) … kaponoh (kah-poh-NOH)
much ... mana (MAH-nah)
my, me, I … ono (OH-noh)
new … puna (POO-nah)
new moon … kilo-icha (KEE-loh-EE-chah)
news … kalama (kah-LAH-mah)
night … mohulo (moh-HOO-loh)
no … nacha (NAH-chah)
of … ih (EE)
old … pa-oh-li (pah-OH-lee)
old ones (wisdom circle, council of elders) …
pah-o-lima (PAH-oh-LEE-mah)
or … oh (OH)
our, we, us … pono (POH-noh)
[past tense] … huko (HOO-koh)
path … maliha (mah-LEE-hah)
peace … makuh-a (mah-KOO-ah)
people … nanah-o (nah-NAH-oh)
person … hunu (HOO-noo)
place … lunu (LOO-noo)
planet … huminumi (HOO-mee-NOO-mee)
plant that ‘opens your eyes’ (presumably for cataracts)
… ushama (oo-SHAH-mah)
please … kumi-umi (KOO-mee OO-mee)
[plural] … -mah (MAH)
proper principles … pakaloh-a (PAH-kah-LOH-ah)
purpose … haga (HAH-gah)
puzzle … punupunu (POO-noo-POO-noo)
304
English Glossary
race, run … polama (poh-LAH-mah)
race, run (v) … polamah (poh-lah-MAH)
reason … tomu (TOH-moo)
river … kuli (KOO-lee)
see you soon … chalah (chah-LAH),
kamuh-o (kah-MOO-oh)
seeing plant (plant that ‘opens your eyes’—presumably
for cataracts) … ushama (oo-SHAH-mah)
she … unu-ah (OO-noo-AH)
shine, glow … lanako (lah-NAH-koh)
shine, glow (v) … lanakoh (lah-nah-KOH)
ship … lakih-o (lah-KEE-oh)
short … ku (KOO)
shrink, decrease (v) … umuh (oo-MOO)
shrinking, decreasing … umu (OO-moo)
sister … hana (HAH-nah)
sisters … hana-mah (HAH-nah-MAH)
sleep … himiha (hee-MEE-hah)
sleep (v) … himihah (HEE-mee-HAH)
smell, give off a bad … pichah (pee-CHAH)
smelly … picha (PEE-chah)
solstice (short day, winter) …
shama-ku (SHA-mah-KOO)
solstice (long day, summer) …
shama-kuh-o (SHA-mah-KOO-oh)
solution … punani (poo-NAH-nee)
solve (v) … punanih (POO-nah-NEE)
something known … hunchana (hun-CHAH-nah)
speak (v) … kupanih (KOO-pah-NEE)
speech … kupani (koo-PAH-nee)
spirit … uh-a-muh-a (OO-ah-MOO-ah)
stand (v) … poluh (poh-LOO)
star … tani (TAH-nee)
305
Appendix
story … kupaku (koo-PAH-koo)
story, tell a (v) … kupakuh (koo-pah-KOO)
strong … palohi (pah-LOH-hee)
sun … chumi (CHOO-mee)
sunrise … chumi-umuh-o (CHOO-mee-oo-MOO-oh)
sunset … chumi-umu (CHOO-me-OO-moo)
surf … kapuki (kah-POO-kee)
surf (v) … kapukih (kah-poo-KEE)
talk … kupani (koo-PAH-nee)
talk (v) … kupanih (KOO-pah-NEE)
thank you [emphatic] … kamalani
(KAH-mah-LAH-nee)
thanks ... chalah (chah-LAH)
they (feminine) … punu-ah (POO-noo-AH)
they (masculine) … punu-ih (POO-noo-EE)
they (neuter) … punu-uh (POO-noo-OO)
thing … mala (MAH-lah)
threat … hini (HEE-nee)
threaten (v) … hinih (hee-NEE)
time … omuno (oh-MOO-noh)
to … alu (AH-loo)
together … muhama (moo-HAH-mah)
toward … alu (AH-loo)
truth … tahilo (tah-HEE-loh)
tune in (v) … makupoh (MAH-koo-POH)
tuning in … makupo (mah-KOO-poh)
universe … poho-poho (POH-hoh-POH-hoh)
us, we, our … pono (POH-noh)
very … nama (NAH-mah)
village … hanako (hah-NAH-koh)
wait for (v) … (LAH-nah-KOO)
waiting … lanaku (lah-NAH-koo)
walk … mali (MAH-lee)
306
English Glossary
walk (v) … malih (mah-LEE)
want, desire … pakalih-a (PAH-kah-LEE-ah)
want, desire (v) … pakali-ah (PAH-ka-lee-AH)
water … kolu (KOH-loo)
we, our, us … pono (POH-noh)
welcome … katana (kah-TAH-nah)
well (for water) … hakanami (HAH-kah-NAH-mee)
what? … mala-poki? (MAH-lah-POH-kee)
when? … omuno-poki? (oh-MOO-noh-POH-kee)
where? … lunu-poki? (LOO-noo-POH-kee)
who? … hunu-poki? (HOO-noo-POH-kee)
why? … tomu-poki? (TOH-moo-POH-kee)
wife … lanah-o (lah-NAH-oh)
with … maku (MAH-koo)
wisdom … kanamana (KAH-nah-MAH-nah)
wisdom circle, council of elders …
pah-o-lima (PAH-oh-LEE-mah)
woman … huna (HOO-nah)
work … kanalo (kah-NAH-loh)
work (v) … kanaloh (kah-nah-LOH)
world … huminumi (HOO-mee-NOO-mee)
year … shama-shama (SHA-ma-SHA-ma)
yes … tah (TAH)
you, your (plural) … pana (PAH-nah)
you, your (singular) … ana (AH-nah)
you're welcome … chalah (chah-LAH)
307
Appendix
308
Chana Glossary
Chana Glossary
The Chana vowels are a (AH), o (OH), i (EE), and u
(OO).
The Chana sounds are g, h, k, l, m, n, p, r, t, ch, sh.
Stress any vowel that has an ‘h’ after it (chicoh = cheeKOH). (This does not apply to the pronunciation guide
words.) Otherwise, just stress the next to last syllable
(alani = ah-LAH-nee). Nouns and adjectives have the
stress on the next to last syllable. Verbs have the stress
on the last syllable. Here are a few exceptions where
the last syllable is stressed: the Great Spirit, Uh-a-Muhah Pohoh (OO-ah-MOO-ah po-HOH); hooligah (HOOlee-GAH); hello, thank you, good-bye, you’re welcome,
chalah (chah-LAH). Plurals have the stress on the last
syllable.
Nouns change to verbs by changing the stress. E.g.,
kupani (koo-PAH-nee) is the noun for a talk or speech
while kupanih (koo-pah-NEE) is the verb to talk or give
a speech. To make a noun plural, add a hyphen and mah
(MAH) after the noun.
For past tense, add the word huko (HOO-koh) after the
verb. For future tense, add the word nuhuno (noo-HOOnoh) after the verb.
There are no articles (a, an, the).
Adjectives can come before or after a noun; e.g., ‘good
man’ or ‘man good.’ Adverbs can come before or after
a verb, e.g., ‘to run strong’ or ‘strong to run.’ A Chana
309
Appendix
adjective and a Chana adverb are usually the same
word. A nouns is often the same as an adjective. For
example, kama is good and also goodness.
The word on the left (glossary word) is how the word is
spelled in writing. The word in parentheses (pronunciation guide word) is how the word is pronounced. Finally, there is the definition.
Glossary word, pronunciation guide word, definition.
ah (AH) … and
alani (ah-LAH-nee) … beach
alu (AH-loo) … to, toward
ana (AH-nah) … you, your (singular)
ana paki? (AH-nah PAH-kee?) … how are you?
chalah (chah-LAH) … good-bye (see you soon),
thanks, you’re welcome, good morning, good
evening, hello, ciao
chana(s) (CHAH-nah) … dreams, talents, imagination,
genius, resources, experience, aspirations, proficiency, knowledge, wisdom, skills, vision, adventures, moxie, intelligence, energy, creativity,
information, personality, opportunities, potentialities, excitement, intuition, leadership, passion, capabilities, understanding, insight, interests, abilities, brilliance, ideas, explorations
chapo (CHAH-poh) … land
chico (CHEE-koh) … something I have
chicoh (chee-KOH) … to have, to hold
chumi (CHOO-mee) … sun
chumi-umuh-o (CHOO-mee-oo-MOO-oh) … sunrise
chumi-umu (CHOO-mee-OO-moo) … sunset
310
Chana Glossary
conchana (con-CHAH-nah) … against
concho (CON-choh) … disharmony
haga (HAH-gah) … purpose
hagah-o (hah-GAH-oh) … destiny
hakalo (hah-KAH-loh) … channel
hakaloh (HAH-kah-LOH) … to channel
hakanami (HAH-kah-NAH-mee) … well (for water)
hamino (hah-MEE-noh) … favorable
hana (HAH-nah) … sister
hana-mah (HAH-nah-MAH) … sisters
hanako (hah-NAH-koh) … village
hani (HAH-nee) … brother
hani-mah (HAH-nee-MAH) … brothers
hanu (HAH-noo) … any
hanumi (hah-NOO-mee) … anyone
hapuh (hah-POO) … to hear
hinacha (hee-NAH-chah) … deception, fraud
hinachah (HEE-nah-CHAH) … to deceive, to defraud
hini (HEE-nee) … threat
hinih (hee-NEE) … to threaten
hooligah (HOO-lee-GAH) … hooligah (an insect, native to Kanatara, somewhat similar to the cicada, or the chicharra found in Latin America)
huko (HOO-koh) … [past tense]
hula (HOO-lah) … cloud
huminumi (HOO-mee-NOO-mee) …
planet, world, earth
huna (HOO-nah) … woman
hunchana (hun-CHAH-nah) …
something known, a fact
hunchanah (hun-chah-NAH) … to know
huni (HOO-nee) … man
hunih-o (hoo-NEE-oh) … cosmic
311
Appendix
hunikana (HOO-nee-KAH-nah) … humankind
huno (HOO-noh) … friend (masculine or feminine)
huno-ah (HOO-noh-AH) … friend (feminine)
huno-ih (HOO-noh-EE) … friend (masculine)
huno-uh (HOO-noh-OO) … friend (unspecified gender)
hunu (HOO-noo) … person
hunu-poki? (HOO-noo-POH-kee) … who?
icha (EE-chah) … little
ih (EE) … of
kachapoh-a (KAH-chah-POH-ah) …
correct conduct, correct action
kala (KAH-lah) … hot springs
kalama (kah-LAH-mah) … news
kalamuna (KAH-lah-MOO-nah) … inner independence
kalih-o (kah-LEE-oh) … forever
kalilani (KAH-lee-LAH-nee) … hooray, hurrah
kalo-hapo-umu (KAH-loh-HAH-poh-OO-moo) …
equinox (decreasing, fall)
kalo-hapo-umuh-o
(KAH-loh-HAH-poh-oo-MOO-oh) …
increasing, spring equinox
kama (KAH-mah) …good
kamalani (KAH-mah-LAH-nee) …
Thank you [emphatic]
kamoni (kah-MOH-nee) … love
kamonih (kah-moh-NEE) … to love
kamuh-o (kah-MOO-oh) … good-bye (for a short time)
kamu-oh (kah-moo-OH) … good-bye (for a long time)
kana (KAH-nah) … far
kanalo (kah-NAH-loh … work
kanaloh (kah-nah-LOH) … to work
kanamana (KAH-nah-MAH-nah) … wisdom
kanamuni (KAH-nah-MOO-nee) … dream
312
Chana Glossary
kanamunih (KAH-nah-moo-NEE) … to dream
kapono (kah-POH-noh) … move, movement
kaponoh (kah-poh-NOH) … to move
kapuki (kah-POO-kee) … surf
kapukih (kah-poo-KEE) … to surf
katana (kah-TAH-nah) … welcome
kilo (KEE-loh) … moon
kilo-hamino (KEE-loh-hah-MEE-noh) …
favorable moon
kilo-icha (KEE-loh-EE-chah) … new moon
kilo-poho (KEE-loh-POH-hoh) … full moon
koha (KOH-hah) … inner, inside
koho (KOH-hoh) … hello (more likely to be used
among friends and family)
kolu (KOH-loo) … water
komi (KOH-mee) … doing
komi-poki? (KOH-mee-POH-kee) … how?
komih (koh-MEE) … to do, to act
komuni (koh-MOO-nee) … life
komunih (KOH-moo-NEE) … to live
ku (KOO) … short
kuh-o (KOO-oh) … long
kuli (KOO-lee) … river
kumi-umi (KOO-mee OO-mee) … please
kumula (koo-MOO-lah) … bird
kumula-chana (koo-MOO-lah-CHAH-nah) …
chanabird
kupaku (koo-PAH-koo) … story
kupakuh (KOO-pah-KOO) … to tell a story
kupani (koo-PAH-nee) … talk, speech
kupanih (koo-pah-NEE) … to talk, to speak
lakih-o (lah-KEE-oh) … boat, ship
lamoni (lah-MOH-nee) … economically independent
313
Appendix
lamonih (LAH-moh-NEE) …
to become economically independent
lanah-o (lah-NAH-oh) … wife
lanako (lah-NAH-koh) … glow
lanakoh (lah-nah-KOH) … to glow, to shine
lanaku (lah-NAH-koo) … waiting
lanakuh (LAH-nah-KOO) … to await, to wait for
lani (LAH-nee) … awesome
lanih-o (lah-NEE-oh) … husband
lunu (LOO-noo) … place
lunu-poki? (LOO-noo-POH-kee) … where?
-mah (MAH) … [Plural]
mahano (mah-HAH-noh) … day
maholo (mah-HOH-loh) … deep
maholo-maholo (mah-HOH-loh-mah-HOH-loh) …
deepest
mako (MAH-koh) … dark
makoh-a (mah-KOH-ah) … harmony
maku (MAH-koo) … with
makuh-a (mah-KOO-ah) … peace
makupo (mah-KOO-poh) … tuning in
makupoh (MAH-koo-POH) … to tune in
mala (MAH-lah) … thing
mala-poki? (MAH-lah-POH-kee) … what?
mali (MAH-lee) … walk
malih (mah-LEE) … to walk
maliha (mah-LEE-hah) … path
maliko (mah-LEE-koh) … journey
malikoh (MAH-lee-KOH) … to journey
mana (MAH-nah) … much, many
mana-mana (MAH-nah MAH-nah) … lots and lots
matika (mah-TEE-kah) … dawn
mohulo (moh-HOO-loh) … night
314
Chana Glossary
muhama (moo-HAH-mah) … together
muhulu (moo-HOO-loo) … contemplation
muhuluh (MOO-hoo-LOO) … to contemplate
nacha (NAH-chah) … no
nacha-komi (NAH-chah-KOH-mee) … forbidden
nachana (nah-CHA-nah) … it doesn’t matter
nama (NAH-mah) … very
nanah-o (nah-NAH-oh) … people
nuhuno (noo-HOO-noh) … [future tense]
omuno (oh-MOO-noh) … time
omuno-poki? (oh-MOO-noh-POH-kee) … when?
oh (OH) … or
ono (OH-noh) … I, me, my
pacho (PAH-choh) … hot
pah (PAH) … more
pah-ah (pah-AH) … most
pah-o-lima (PAH-oh-LEE-mah) …
council of elders, wisdom circle
pakali-ah (PAH-kah-lee-AH) … to desire, to want
pakalih-a (PAH-kah-LEE-ah) … desire, want
pakaloh-a (PAH-kah-LOH-ah) … proper principles
paki (PAH-kee) … how? [feeling]
palohi (pah-LOH-hee) … strong
palu (PAH-loo) … from
pana (PAH-nah) … you, your (plural)
pana paki? (PAH-nah PAH-kee) …
how are you (plural)?
picha (PEE-chah) … smelly
pichah (pee-CHAH) … to give off a bad smell
poh-a-koh-a (POH-ah-KOH-ah) … island
poho (POH-hoh) … big, great
poho-hanako (POH-hoh-hah-NAH-koh) … city
poho-muhama (PO-hoh-moo-HAH-mah) … festival
315
Appendix
poho-poho (POH-hoh-POH-hoh) … universe
pokih (poh-KEE) … to come
polah (poh-LAH) … to go
polama (poh-LAH-mah) … race, run
polamah (POH-lah-MAH) … to race, to run
poluh (poh-LOO) … to stand
pono (POH-noh) … we, our, us
puh-o (POO-oh) … head
puma (POO-mah) … heavy
pumala (poo-MAH-lah) … mountain
puna (POO-nah) … new
punani (poo-NAH-nee) … solution
punanih (POO-nah-NEE) … to solve, to figure out
punihana (POO-nee-HAH-nah) … force
punihanah (POO-nee-hah-NAH) …
to force, to use force
punu-ah (POO-noo-AH) … she (plural)
punu-ih (POO-noo-EE) … he (plural)
punu-uh (POO-noo-OO) … it (plural)
punupunu (POO-noo-POO-noo) … puzzle, conundrum
shama-ku (SHA-mah-KOO) …
short day (winter) solstice
shama-kuh-o (SHA-mah-KOO-oh) …
long day (summer) solstice
shama-shama (SHA-mah-SHA-mah) … year
tah (TAH) … yes
tahilo (tah-HEE-loh) … truth
tahilo-palohi (tah-HEE-loh-pay-LOH-hee) … honesty
tahimi (tah-HEE-mee) … home
takano (tah-KAH-noh) … guide
takano-punani (tah-KAH-noh-poo-NAH-nee) …
guidebook
takanoh (TAH-kah-NOH) … to guide
316
Chana Glossary
takuh-o (tah-KOO-oh) … happy, happiness
tali (TAH-lee) … light
talikoha (TAH-lee-KOH-hah) … inner light
tani (TAH-nee) … star
tara (TAH-rah) … beautiful
tolu-ah (TOH-loo-AH) … to agree
toluh-a (toh-LOO-ah) … agreement
tomu (TOH-moo) … reason
tomu-poki? (TOH-moo-POH-kee) … why?
tumuno (too-MOO-noh) … completeness
tumunoh (TOO-moo-NOH) … to complete
uh-a-muh-a (OO-ah-MOO-ah) … spirit
Uh-a-Muh-a Pohoh (OO-ah-MOO-ah poh-HOH) …
Great Spirit
ulumi (oo-LOO-mee) … bright
umu (OO-moo) … decreasing, shrinking
umu-oh (OO-moo-OH) … to grow, to increase
umuh (oo-MOO) … to decrease, to shrink
umuh-o (oo-MOO-oh) …
growth, growing, increase, increasing
unami (oo-NAH-mee) … awake, awakening
unamih (OO-nah-MEE) … to awaken
unu-ah (OO-noo-AH) … she
unu-ih (OO-noo-EE) … he
unu-uh (OO-noo-OO) … it
ushama (oo-SHAH-mah) … plant that opens the eyes
317
Appendix
318
Chana Calendar
Chana Calendar
Year divided into four quarters, by solstices and equinoxes; with three new moons and three full
moons in each
MOONS
New (Little) Moon … kilo-icha
—begins when the first sliver of new moon can
be seen
—time of beginnings, teaching, council of elders
—time to plant, begin a journey, marry
—visiting neighbors and eating all day long
Full (Big) Moon … kilo-poho
—all-night celebrations
—food and drink all night long
Favorable Moon kilo-hamino
—fourth new moon or fourth full moon in
quarter
—new or full moon at time of solstice or
equinox
—favorable for marriage or important decisions
SOLSTICES
Solstice … shama
—time of great celebration
Short day/long night (winter) solstice in June …
shama-ku
319
Appendix
—all-night celebration
Long day/short night (summer) solstice in December …
shama-kuh-o
—start of the year
—time to start long sea voyages around the
World
EQUINOXES
Equinox … kalo-hapo
—time of quiet and contemplation
—council of elders (wisdom circle)
Fall (decreasing) equinox in March … kalo-hapo-umu
Spring (increasing) equinox in September …
kalo-hapo-umuh-o
DAY
Day … mahano
—begins and ends at sunset
YEAR
Year … shama shama
—begins at summer solstice
320
Chana Numbers
Chana Numbers
Remember a (AH) o (OH) I (EE)
1 ka (KAH)
2 ka ka
3 ka ka ka
1
2
3
4 ko (KOH)
5 ko ko
6 ko ko ko
4
5
6
7 ki (KEE)
8 ki ki
9 ki ki ki
7
8
9
10 cha (CHAH)
20 cha cha
30 cha cha cha
10
20
30
40 cho (CHO)
50 cho cho
60 cho cho cho
40
50
60
70 chi (CHEE)
80 chi chi
90 chi chi chi
70
80
90
100 kala (KAH-lah) 100
1000 lama (LAH-
1,000
mah)
1,000,000
1,000,000
Palaka
(pah-LAH-kah)
321
Appendix
Chana Numbers
15 cha ko ko
15
102 kala ka ka
102
300
ka ka ka kala
300
OR 300
kala kala kala
300
1,008 lama ki ki
1,008
1,080
lama chi chi
1,080
8,000 ki ki lama 8,000
80,000
chi chi lama
80,000
2,000,000
ka ka palaka
2,000,000
OR 2,000,000
palaka palaka
2,000,000
322
pakaloh-a
kachapoh-a
pakaloh-a (proper principles)
honesty, innocence, humility, purity,
gentleness, forgiveness, generosity, virtue,
tolerance, patience, acceptance, modesty,
balance, inner independence, justice, understanding, and similar values
kachapoh-a (correct action)
. . . living by these values (proper principles)
allows you to makupoh (tune in) to the
hakalo (channel), where the Chana people’s
Great Spirit, the Infinite One, will guide you
in fulfilling your haga (purpose) in life and
achieving your hagah-o (destiny).
323
Appendix
324
Rules of the Universe
Rules of the Universe
1.
Honesty. Any type of fraud or deception is forbidden.
2.
No initiation of force (or threat of force) against
another.
3.
Working together in harmony.
4.
Living the life of your deepest dreams.
________________________________________
1.
Tahilo-palohi. Hanu hinacha nacha-komi.
2.
Nacha punihana oh hini punihana.
3.
Kanaloh muhama maku makoh-a.
4.
Komunih komuni ih ana kanamuni-mah.
325
326
Kanadave has traveled in 52 countries—in Latin
America, Europe, the Middle East, Africa, and Asia, He
is a graduate of the University of California at Berkeley
(B.A.) and the Harvard Law School (LLB, J.D.). He is
licensed to practice law in California, Kansas, and before the U.S. Supreme Court.
He spent one year in the MBA program at Stanford Business School. After one year, he dropped out
and went to San Francisco to begin his own entrepreneurial business. He built a successful innovative educational enterprise reported in Time Magazine twice,
the New Yorker Magazine, U.S. News and World Report and by media as far away as Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia.
Later, he built a law firm in San Diego, but
found the practice of law too confining. Not sure of
what he wanted to do with his life, he went on a vision
quest to the middle of the Sahara. He spent 40 days
there, fasting—water only—for thirty of those days. At
the end of that quest, he felt he wanted to make his life
count by doing something for the poor of the world.
He did humanitarian work in the slums of Lopez
Portillo outside Mexico City, took part in medical clinics on the Miskito Coast of Honduras for refugees from
Nicaragua on the “Trail of Tears,” and took aid to
Mozambican refugees in South Africa. He smuggled
Bibles and clothing to the underground church in the
U.S.S.R.
He took a semi-truckload of $100,000 of seeds
and medical supplies through Mexico and Guatemala
for the poor of El Salvador during their civil war. Once
he reached El Salvador, the Salvadoran army stole all
his goods. Through the help of USAID, the Vice-
Minister of Foreign Affairs, the Minister of Health, and
the sub-director of the dreaded National Guard, he was
able to get back more than half of the seeds and supplies and was able to distribute them in many very poor
villages.
During the seven months he was there, he met
and married his wife. Together, they searched the back
country of El Salvador finding severely burned children. Working with Benjamin Bloom Hospital and Dr.
Antonio Bonilla, they were able to bring children to
Shriners Hospital in Los Angeles for reconstructive
surgery.
After they had their first child, they went to Calcutta (Kolkata), India to set up a health mission for the
quarter million people living on the streets. While there,
he wrote his Harvard classmate and section mate, Supreme Court Justice David Souter. “Life has taken you
to the very top. It has taken me to the very bottom of
incredible poverty.” During their six months in Calcutta, he worked with Mother Teresa at Kalighat, her first
home for the destitute and dying. When the Missionaries of Charity learned that he had a four-month-old baby at home a few blocks away, they discouraged him
from further work with them because of the abundance
of disease and their concern for the baby. However,
they did take their baby daughter to Mother Teresa at
the Mother House, and she threw the baby up in the air,
saying, “Maybe one day you will be a Missionary of
Charity.” He was asked to read the Bible to Mother Teresa and her nuns at a Maundy Thursday service during
Holy Week.
Since 1981, he has prepared more than 2,400
successful applications for nonprofits to obtain their
501c3 status with the IRS. Those nonprofits are operating all around the world, improving the lives of multitudes of people.
Kanadave is looking for people who want to
help establish Kanatara globally as an economic, educational, social, and spiritual platform so that all may discover their purpose in life and achieve their destiny,
making the world a better place for everyone. Their
destiny is to be a catalyst for moving into the next stage
of humankind’s development and entering the golden
age. He says, “My faith and joy are bubbling up inside
of me to know that we are living in this most exciting
time in earth’s history.” He is looking for entrepreneurs
to establish Kanaversity and local Kanatara embassies
and consulates all over the world.
Read the story of how an undiscovered island in
the South Pacific became the catalyst for change in
earth’s culture, bringing humankind out of its chrysalis
and into the coming age. Within this story, you can
discover your purpose in life and fall in love with your
destiny.
Dawn is just breaking over Kanatara....
... a technologically advanced, ecologically brilliant paradise
... sun-drenched, breezy, cool waves,
in the flow of earth and stars
... techno-tribal visionaries, walking softly on the earth
... the opening pages of the first chapter of a new culture,
the forerunner of a golden era,
and a remarkable new community
... a gathering of people on the Journey
... making the Journey more in tune with the planet
... merge your radiant mind and the light of your genius
with the brilliance of others.
Move to Kanatara….
Kanatara is a fresh breeze blowing across the planet....
Where all your dreams come true....
Move to Kanatara....